JP7136262B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

In this type of game machine, as a kind of effect corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, etc., sound effect may be performed by sound generating means such as a speaker.

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, in the above-exemplified game machine, there is a demand for more suitable effects, and there is still room for improvement, for example, in terms of sound effects.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably performing effects.

The present invention
A gaming machine comprising sound reproducing means capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generating means,
Having a plurality of the sound reproducing means,
a first reproduction period during which the sound is reproduced by the first sound reproduction means among the plurality of sound reproduction means; and a second reproduction period during which the sound is reproduced by the second sound reproduction means different from the first sound reproduction means. Means capable of generating a specific period during which a special sound is reproduced that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to comprehend the sound reproduced by at least one of the sound reproduction means during the overlapping period in which the above overlaps. with
The end timing of the first reproduction period overlaps with the end timing of the second reproduction period .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform an effect.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop buttons and the winning modes that are established; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting process by a sub-control apparatus. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of an alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flow chart which shows processing for bonus information. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a special combination notification process; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display production|presentation by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display production|presentation by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display production|presentation by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display production|presentation by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display production|presentation by a liquid crystal display device. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of continuous production. 9 is a flowchart showing effect data setting processing; 7 is a flowchart showing display data setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between effect contents, effect commands, and display data; 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing by the display control device; 6 is a flowchart showing sound data setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the contents of the presentation and the sound data; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between sound data and sound source data; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of output data set; 4 is a flowchart showing sound generation processing by a sound source IC; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining silence data in relation to volume data; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between frame update timing of display effect and sound data; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the contents of the presentation and the sound data in the second embodiment; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between frame update timing of display effect and sound data; In the third embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the difference between the number-of-games management type effect and the time management type effect. 6 is a flowchart showing sound data setting processing; In the fourth embodiment, it is an explanatory diagram for explaining the generation point of the specific sound in the special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special effects by a main-control apparatus. It is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between special effects and sound data.

<First embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually by driving the stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “first replay” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), and a “red 7” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L). th), “watermelon” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “white bell” symbol (eg, 12th on left reel 32L), “second replay” symbol (eg, 11th on left reel 32L) , “White 7” symbol (eg, 10th on left reel 32L), “Cherry” symbol (eg, 9th on left reel 32L), “BAR” symbol (eg, 5th on left reel 32L), “Youth” There are 10 types of symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on a bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated by the number of bets of medals and a line that is not activated are set. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not given.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as valid lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as valid lines. In the following, a game that starts with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game that starts with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game that starts with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 32nd small winning combination.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 1st minor role. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 17th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. A winning mode in which the "red bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the upper line L1. is. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. When it stops, it becomes the 5th minor winning prize. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, "red bell" symbols are arranged at positions (12th, 15th) adjacent to the "cherry" symbols (11th, 14th) on the upstream side. On the right reel 32R, "red bell" symbols are arranged at positions (2nd and 5th) separated by one symbol upstream from the "second replay" symbols (0th and 3rd). Therefore, when the fifth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 17th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 18th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage. When the 18th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Red 7", "BAR", and "Watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and "Red Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line. In that case, it will be the 19th minor role winning prize. When the 19th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 20th to 24th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the case of a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 25th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage, like the 18th minor winning combination. In the case of winning the 18th minor winning combination, the "Red 7" symbol or the "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R can be stopped in the middle row only when the BB and the BB are won in duplicate ("Second replay" symbol, If the combination of the "BAR" symbol and the "BAR" symbol) wins the 25th minor win, the "Red 7" symbol or the "White 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the middle row regardless of whether or not the BB is won. can. When the 25th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "watermelon" symbol or "BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the effective line, the 26th small win. Win a prize. When the 26th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Red bell" or "White bell" pattern on the left reel 32L, "Red 7" pattern, "BAR" pattern, "White bell" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, and "Youth" pattern on the middle reel 32M. When the "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R and the symbol stop on the activated line, the 28th minor winning combination is won. As shown in FIG. 6, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" pattern (3rd, 7th, 15th and 20th) and downstream adjacent positions (2nd, 6th, 14th and 19th). ), and a "second replay" symbol is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" symbol (12th) on the downstream side. On the right reel 32R, "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 10th, 15th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side have "No. 1 replay” symbols or “second replay” symbols are arranged. Therefore, when the 28th minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4, the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R will have "bells" except for the case where the "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage. While the symbols and the “replay” symbols are in tense, the “bell” symbols and the “replay” symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tense failure. When the 28th minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 29th minor winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the ninth "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper or middle row, and the 29th minor winning combination is established, the left The "white bell" symbol on the reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 29th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 30th minor role. Although the details will be described later, the 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 30th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, Won 31 minor roles. Although the details will be described later, the 31st minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 31st minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white 7" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 32nd small Awarded for the role. When the 32nd minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include the first to eighth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. The 1st re-game winning to the 8th re-game winning are winning modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

State transition winnings in which only game state transition is performed include 1st BB winning, 2nd BB winning and CB winning.

When the "red 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the 1BB win is won, and when the "white 7" pattern of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the activated line. When the "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "second replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the second BB win is achieved. . When these BB prizes are established, the game state shifts to the BB state. Also, when the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line. , CB prize. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol, the middle reel 32M has a "red 7" symbol, a "BAR" symbol, a "white bell" symbol, a "cherry" symbol, and a right reel 32M symbol. When the "watermelon" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Also, a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "white 7" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, and a "first replay" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R. The game state shifts to the first RT state also when the symbols, "white 7", "second replay", and "cherry" symbols stop on the activated line. Hereinafter, the combinations of the above symbols are referred to as transitional numbers.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The stop switches 42 to 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an action of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided at the lower front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect is generated. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored condition, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals, and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display section 62, there is provided a push order notification section 68 for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42-44. . The pressing order notification unit 68 is composed of three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44, respectively. It should be noted that the pressing order notification unit 68 can also be replaced by a liquid crystal display or the like. 44 may be arranged adjacent to each other with LED lamps.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker device 64 and a liquid crystal display device 65 as an auxiliary display section for giving various information to the player are provided. The liquid crystal display device 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called a liquid crystal display device 65 . An upper lamp 63, a speaker device 64, a sub-control device 81 for driving the liquid crystal display device 65, and a display control device 201 (not shown, see FIG. 12) are provided on the back of the liquid crystal display device 65. FIG.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. That is, the winning probability of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of DC 12 volts in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. This power failure signal is also supplied to the sub-controller 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts, which is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101, even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit The input/output port 104 includes a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68, a sub-control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), and the like. connected through

The CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the sub-controller 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 82 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 82 has a ROM 83 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 82, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A RAM 84 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The sub-controller 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the main controller 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker device 64, and the display control device 201 are connected to the output side. ing. Based on various commands input from the main control device 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker device 64, and the display control device 201 are driven and controlled. In other words, the sub-control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for the sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games.

The speaker device 64 has a plurality of individual speakers 87a to 87w (first speaker 87a to 23rd speaker 87w). The individual speakers 87a to 87w are installed so that at least one of the installation position and the sound output direction is different. Here, an outline of a configuration for outputting sounds (voices) from the plurality of individual speakers 87a to 87w will be described.

The sub-control device 81 is provided with a sound source IC for controlling the output of sound, and in this embodiment, the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w are provided as the sound source ICs. A first amplifier 86a to a 23rd amplifier 86w and a first speaker 87a to a 23rd speaker 87w are connected to correspond to the respective sound source ICs 85a to 85w. In this embodiment, 23 channels are provided as sound output channels. there is When executing a sound effect using sound, the CPU 82 outputs sound data as sound information to be reproduced to the sound source ICs 85a to 85w. The sound source ICs 85a to 85w read sound source data corresponding to the sound data from the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83, and reproduce the sound source data to output sounds from the individual speakers 87a to 87w via the corresponding amplifiers 86a to 86w. to output Processing related to the output of sound data to the sound source ICs 85a-85w, the readout of sound data by the sound source ICs 85a-85w, and the sound output of the individual speakers 87a-87w will be described later in detail. In the following description, the sound source ICs 85a to 85w are collectively referred to as the sound source IC 85, the amplifiers 86a to 86w are collectively referred to as the amplifier 86, and the individual speakers 87a to 87w are collectively referred to as the individual speaker 87. The speaker device 64 including the sound source IC 85, the amplifier 86, and the individual speaker 87 constitute sound generation means (sound reproduction means).

The input side of the sub-control device 81 is connected with a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66). The input side of the sub-controller 81 is connected to a first Vol switch 75 and a second Vol switch 76 as switches for adjusting the volume of sounds from the individual speakers 87a to 87w. The first Vol switch 75 is a volume switch for the administrator of the game hall, and is provided at a position where it cannot be operated without opening the front door 12, such as the back of the sub-control device 81 (Fig. 3 etc. are omitted). On the other hand, the second Vol switch 76 is a volume switch for the player, and is provided at a position where it can be operated without opening the front door 12, such as a position adjacent to the performance switch 66 (see FIG. 1). etc. are omitted). Note that the second Vol switch 76 may also be used as the production switch 66 . That is, the first Vol switch 75 is a volume switch that cannot be operated by the player but can be operated by the manager of the game hall, and the second Vol switch 76 can be operated by the player but can also be operated by the manager of the game hall. A volume switch is possible.

The first Vol switch 75 can set the volume in a plurality of steps. As the value of the set sound volume increases, the sound volume increases, the set sound volume 9 becomes the maximum sound volume, and in the case of the set sound volume 0 which becomes the minimum sound volume, the corresponding sound is not output even when the sound performance is generated.

The second Vol switch 76 can also set the volume in a plurality of steps. For example, the volume can be set in 10 steps from setting volume 1 to setting 10. As with the first Vol switch 75, the volume increases as the value of the set volume increases, and the set volume 10 becomes the maximum volume. On the other hand, unlike the first Vol switch 75, even when the set volume is 1, which is the minimum volume, when a sound effect occurs, the corresponding sound is output, albeit in a small amount.

For example, when the set volume of the first Vol switch 75 is 0, no sound is output regardless of the set volume of the second Vol switch 76 . Also, when the set volume of the first Vol switch 75 is any value from 1 to 9, the output volume is determined by that value and the set volume of the second Vol switch 76 . In this case, a range is defined for each of the volume settings 1 to 9 of the first Vol switch 75, and by adjusting the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76, the range corresponding to the volume setting on the side of the first Vol switch 75 can be adjusted. The volume is determined within the range of The ranges determined for the volume settings 1 to 9 of the first Vol switch 75 may be determined so that different volume settings overlap with each other, or may be determined so that they do not overlap. may have been

For either one or both of the first Vol switch 75 and the second Vol switch 76, the volume from each of the individual speakers 87a to 87w may be individually settable.

The display control device 201 is provided with a CPU 202 , which is an element in which a program ROM 203 and a work RAM 204 are integrated into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 205 , a character ROM 206 and a video RAM 207 .

The CPU 202 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control device 81 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 205 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 205).

A program ROM 203 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 202, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require power supply from the outside to hold stored information. The work RAM 204 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the CPU 202, and is a volatile storage means that requires power supply from the outside to hold stored information. is.

The VDP 205 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 65 . Since the VDP 205 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 205 adjusts the timings of the CPU 202, the video RAM 207, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

The character ROM 206 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65 . The character ROM 206 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM 207 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65 , and the display content of the liquid crystal display device 65 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 207 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, the processes related to the progress of the game, that is, the timer interrupt process and the normal process performed in the main process will be described below with reference to FIGS. 14 to 41. FIG.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is being output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main processing.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, a command output process for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the sub-control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting process to the respective display units 60 to 62 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the sub-controller 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the sub-controller 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting three virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, one virtual medal is inserted. Perform processing for automatically inserting medals. By the way, in the present embodiment, the replay win is not established in the 2-bet game, but if the transformation is such that the replay win is established even in the 2-bet game, two coins are used in the automatic insertion process. should be set so that the virtual medals can be automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, when any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, BB state), "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers. That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets for which affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the sub-control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the sub-controller 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the sub-controller 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the valid line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to the non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number to be used when judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is correct or not is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned on, and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set in the subsequent step S304. In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let it be the judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM106. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=20, in step S306, a winning flag indicating that the 1st to 5th minor wins and the 14th to 17th minor wins have been won is set. It is set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

Incidentally, the set winning flag indicates that the 1BB has been won (hereinafter referred to as "1BB winning flag") or the winning flag indicating that the 2BB has been won (hereinafter referred to as "2BB winning flag"). ), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. In addition, in step S306 in the state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the 1BB, 2BB, If a winning combination other than CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S307, and in the following step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 13) is about 1/263, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 14) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a watermelon (probability of winning when IV=15) is about 1/154, and the probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=16) is about 1/252. , the probability of winning the chance B (the probability of winning when IV=17) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward-push bell 1, forward-push bell 2, pinch-push bell 1, and pinch-push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 20 to 23) are about 1/164, middle-push bell 1, The probability of winning middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=24 to 27) is about 1/16.4, respectively. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1/1770, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is About 1/4680, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=33) is about 1/3280, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=34) The probability of winning is about 1 in 6550. The probability of winning watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1/3280, the probability of winning watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 6550 1/1. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, and chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=37 to 40) is about 1/3280. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=41, 42) is about 1/2620, respectively. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB alone (probability of winning when IV=43, 44) is about 1/65500, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=45) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.94.

In addition, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV=2-12, 28-30, 46-49 in the lottery table for the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S310, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery result in steps S301 to S309, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the sub-control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the sub-controller 81 . Command transmission to the sub-controller 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process previously described.

Then, in step S312, stop information setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the lottery processing ends. In the stop information setting process, when a plurality of roles among the small win, replay, and bonus roles are won, the stop information is set in the following order of priority. The stop information is set so that the minor winning combination is preferentially established when the small winning combination and the bonus are won, and the bonus winning is established when the minor winning combination cannot be established. When winning the replay and the bonus, the stop information is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a rotation effect process is performed. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In step S402, rotation start processing for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating.

In step S403, the CPU waits until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a predetermined rotational speed, and determines whether or not an invalid period has elapsed from the start of rotation. If the invalid period has not passed, the process waits in step S403. When the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes constant and the invalid period elapses, a stop command can be generated by turning on lamps (not shown) of the stop switches 42 to 44. The game player or the like is notified of the fact that it has become, and the process proceeds to step S404 to perform the effective flag setting process. The effective flag setting process is a process for setting the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44 to be effective when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped. Such setting processing will be described later in detail.

After performing the effective flag setting process, it is determined in step S405 whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S406 to determine whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S405 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

If a stop command is issued, a stop command response process is executed in step S407. In the stop command response process, a process for stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the reel for which the stop command has been issued is performed. This corresponding process will be described in detail later, but in the corresponding process, when the stop switch is operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the reference position (lower row in this embodiment) and the stop information storage area 106b Based on the stored stop information, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated, and the rotation of the reel is stopped when the pattern corresponding to the calculated slip number reaches the reference position. In this case, in the present slot machine 10, as the stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. , a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel by four symbols. There are five patterns of stop modes, ie, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being stopped, and reel stop control is performed in one of these stop modes.

After that, in step S408, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S409, and the process returns to step S405.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In this slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=20 to 27, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, sandwich push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second minor winning prize or the fifth minor winning prize is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, and the middle stop switch 43 The stop information is set so that the 1st minor winning combination is established when is operated first, and the 2nd minor winning combination or the 5th minor winning combination is established when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. Set stop information. However, even when the stop information is set in this manner, there are cases where corresponding winnings are not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order. In such a case, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination or the fifth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. Further, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also have a function as a fifth minor winning symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (fifth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 8 "watermelon" symbol of the left reel 32L has reached the lower stage, number 12 "white bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the upper row. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination or the fifth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. The "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the fifth minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. "Cherry" symbols are arranged at the 11th and 14th positions on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning combination pattern or the fifth minor winning combination symbol may stop on the active line, or both the second minor winning combination pattern and the fifth minor winning combination symbol may stop on the active line. or not stop.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" symbol to the 13th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the 5th small combination symbol A barrel "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the fifth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "cherry" symbol to the 17th "first replay" symbol has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. The "red 7" symbol, which is the 2nd minor combination symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second minor winning symbol and the fifth minor winning symbol can be stopped in the middle stage. Can not. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the second "BAR" symbol or the sixth "white bell" symbol stops in the middle stage.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "Red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "red 7" symbol has reached the lower stage, as shown in FIG. As shown, the second minor combination symbol "Red 7" is stopped at the lower stage. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" pattern stops at the lower stage. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the 13th "cherry" symbol has reached the lower stage, the 14th "watermelon" symbol will move to the lower stage as shown in FIG. 20(d). Stop. The combination of the "white bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the fifth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the fifth minor winning combination can be established.

The fifth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is the "second replay" symbol. "Second replay" symbols are arranged at positions 0 and 3 on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the fifth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 17th "BAR" symbol to the 3rd "second replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, the fifth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "second replay" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the fifth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" pattern stops at the lower stage. The combination of "white bell" symbol, "cherry" symbol and "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

If the second minor winning symbol and the fifth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, that is, if the "BAR" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, stop information second In the setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol stops at the bottom.

The "watermelon" symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. The combination of "white bell" design, "BAR" design, and "watermelon" design from the left, and the combination of "white bell" design, "white bell" design, and "watermelon" design from the left are as shown in FIG. It is a transition to .

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 5th minor winning combination are established. Either the winning is established or the transition roll is stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the right reel 32R, "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 29th minor win is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the non-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S408 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S410. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. When the winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S411. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, in step S412, a winning result command is set so that the sub-control device 81 can recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process ends.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins are established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins are established, the re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . When the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the activated line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current game state is the normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second replay winning is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. When the second replay winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line under a game state other than the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the process proceeds to step S503. , the first RT setting flag is set, and this processing ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. When compared with the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 5, and the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/67.0, and the probability of winning when IV=2 to 5 is about 1/32.8. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22 , when IV=1 is won, normal replay is won, and when IV=2 is won, first promotion replay 1 is won, and IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If you do, you will win the first promotion replay 4. The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. To establish.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated when winning the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are turned on.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation sequences. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S506, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and the process ends. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 10, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=11 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/13.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/10.5, and IV = 9 , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1 in 7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to the symbol combination of loose eyes, "2" corresponds to the symbol combination of 7 different colors, middle stop, and "3" is the symbol of red 7, red 7, BAR middle stop. "4" corresponds to a symbol combination of white 7, white 7, and BAR middle stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye is stopped and the fourth replay win is established, or the unique color 7 The symbol combination that results in the middle stage stop of the symbols is stopped, and the fourth re-game winning is established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S509, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. If the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning have not been established, the processing is terminated as it is. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. and terminate this process.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the 3rd RT state has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV = 9, 10 , and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 1/7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, The 7 re-game winning, the 8th re-game winning, and the 3 re-game winning to shift to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

When the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, CB Win a prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

At step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 45, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=46 to 49. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV = 47 The probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium role 3 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/4.00, CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (the probability of winning when IV=49) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination will be won. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, when the 1st minor winning combination, the 18th minor winning combination, the 19th minor winning combination, and the 25th minor winning combination are established, 15 medals are paid out. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 17th minor winning combination and the 20th minor winning combination to the 24th minor winning combination are established, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that allows one game (JAC game) to be executed as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ) may be provided. CB and CB states may also be referred to as MB and MB states.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

Then, when any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

FIG. 28 is a lottery table for the BB state selected in the BB state transitioning to the 1st BB or the 2nd BB. In the BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1-27 and 31-49, and "21845" is set as the point value for IV=28-30. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB medium and small hand 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 28) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB medium red 7 hand (IV = 29) is about 1/3.00, and the probability of winning the BB in BAR matching role (probability of winning when IV = 30) is about 1/3.00 becomes. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 65500.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first small Any one of the winning combination, the 30th minor winning combination, and the 31st minor winning combination is established without fail. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the 1st minor winning combination, the 30th minor winning combination, and the 31st minor winning combination are established. Since the probability of being out in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a game state in which 9 medals are paid out with a very high probability.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S613. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S613, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB prize is established under the normal game state, the normal game state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB prize is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the 1st BB prize is established under the 2nd RT state, the normal game state is entered. By the way, when shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (=9×24-3×24) medals until the BB state ends.

If none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (if NO in step S602), and if none of the first BB winning prize, second BB winning prize, or CB winning prize is established ( If step S609 is NO), if a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, or if the end determination process is performed in step S613, the process proceeds to step S606, Set state command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the sub-control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out in the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery processing using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal game state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third replay win is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, so the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state.

Further, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state. The first RT state does not transition to the third RT state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

Incidentally, when each BB winning flag is carried over, a carryover lottery table (not shown) is used as the lottery table in the lottery process (FIG. 16). In the lottery table for carrying over, the PV values of IV1 to 22 are the same as the PV values of IV1 to 22 in the lottery table for normal game state (FIG. 17), and the PV values after IV23 are set to 0. ing. In other words, on the lottery table for carrying over, the bonus and the overlapping minor combination with the bonus are not won.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states, namely, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the BB state, and the CB state. , an attack mode, a VB mode (including an additional special zone), and a BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

When the normal mode or the challenge mode is shifted to the BB mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode are performed in the BB mode. When the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the attack mode after the BB mode is ended, and when the lottery for the shift to the challenge mode is won, the mode is shifted to the challenge mode after the BB mode is ended. When neither transition lottery is won, the game shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the attack mode is shifted to the BB mode, the attack mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "pressing order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for transition to the challenge mode and a lottery for transition to the attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the challenge mode, and when the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, the normal mode is shifted to the attack mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, so it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The challenge mode is a display mode in which the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins, as in the normal mode. In challenge mode, a lottery for transition to attack mode is held. However, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode in the normal mode. In other words, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not notified as in the normal mode, but the transition to the attack mode is facilitated. Transition to attack mode When the lottery is won, the challenge mode is transitioned to the attack mode. When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) without winning the transition lottery, the challenge mode is shifted to the normal mode. Challenge mode does not switch to VB mode.

The challenge mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when winning the replay of the pressing order, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, and corresponds to the normal game state or the 1st RT state. It will be done. In the challenge mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will be reduced by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the case of the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals decreases by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The attack mode consists of 4 attack modes, 1st attack mode to 4th attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to VB mode. are more likely to migrate. When the lottery for shifting to VB mode is won, the attack mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the attack mode shifts to the normal mode.

The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode is set to be the highest in the fourth attack mode and the lowest in the first attack mode. , 3rd attack mode, and 4th attack mode are set so that the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode increases in this order.

The attack mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, and CB state. However, in the attack mode, since the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins, the player operates the stop switches 42 in the notified order of operation. When ∼44 is operated, it almost corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the second RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

The VB mode, like the attack mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the attack mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the attack mode, the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell is won and when the pressing order replay is won, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won. If so, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is notified. Therefore, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the game state at that time is the second RT state or the first RT state. In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

Regarding the transition of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the challenge mode, shift from the challenge mode to the attack mode, and return from the attack mode to the normal mode. . In the attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode is performed, so if a loop occurs in which the attack mode shifts to the VB mode and then returns from the VB mode to the attack mode, the player expects to increase the number of owned medals. can.

As described above, when the normal mode and the challenge mode are compared, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the attack mode is higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

In addition, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probability of the transition lottery to the VB mode differs in each attack mode. And when it transfers to attack mode from normal mode or challenge mode, it transfers to 1st attack mode fundamentally. In the first attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the second attack mode are held. If the lottery for transition to the second attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the second attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. In the second attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the third attack mode are held. When the lottery for transition to the third attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the third attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for transition to the VB mode is increased. Then, in the third attack mode, a lottery for transition to the VB mode and a lottery for transition to the fourth attack mode are performed. When the lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is won, the mode shifts to the fourth attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases.

Therefore, when transitioning to attack mode, the probability of transition to VB mode is increased by promoting the attack mode as follows: first attack mode→second attack mode→third attack mode→fourth attack mode. A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the attack mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or by stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the attack mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is reported, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to the notification effect on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode shift lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S310) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31 .

In step S701, the result of the lottery this time is strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chances A, B and middle bell, strong cherry duplicates 1 and 2, weak cherry duplicates 1 and 2, watermelon duplicates 1 and 2, chance A duplicates 1. , 2, chance B duplication 1, 2, middle bell duplication 1, 2 (for example, see FIG. 17, IV=13-18, 31-42, hereinafter, these hands are collectively referred to as "specific hand") determine whether or not If the result of the lottery is a specific combination, the processing for switching the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S702 to S708 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined at step S701 that the special combination is not won, then at steps S709 to S712, processing for transitioning to the display mode and the like are performed.

Specifically, when it is determined in step S701 that the special combination is won, in step S702, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal game state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether or not an attack mode win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the attack mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the attack mode. When a negative determination is made in step S703, the first special combination process is executed in step S704.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the first special combination process is performed means a state in which the game is in the normal game state or the first RT state and the attack mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first special winning process, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the challenge mode, and a transition lottery to determine whether the display mode should be shifted to the attack mode. In addition, in the first special combination process, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When the challenge mode is not in progress means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal table is obtained as a table for attack mode lottery from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105 in step S802. On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is affirmative, in step S803, a chance mode table is obtained as a table for attack mode lottery from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105. FIG. In the normal time table and the chance mode table, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set according to the type of special hand. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In addition, the probability of transition to attack mode is different between the normal table and the chance mode table as a whole, and the chance mode table has a higher probability of transition to attack mode than the normal table. is set to

After acquiring the attack mode transition lottery table in step S802 or step S803, attack mode lottery processing is executed in step S804. In this process, the lottery counters are obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 and compared with the lottery table obtained in step S802 or step S803 to perform a lottery for transition to the attack mode.

In step S805, based on the processing result of step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for switching to the attack mode has been won. If the lottery for switching to the attack mode is won, in step S806, a process of setting an attack mode winning flag is performed.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S807, lottery processing for the number of precursor games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, when a lottery for transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode, or the VB mode is won as the display mode transition lottery, the fact that the lottery for transition to the display mode has been won is notified after the portent mode. done. Therefore, the game in which you won the transition lottery and the game in which you are notified that you won the transition lottery may differ, and the game in which you won the transition lottery to the game in which you are notified that you won the transition lottery. , is set as precursor mode.

1 game to 32 games are set as the number of precursor games, and in step S808, one of these 1 to 32 games is randomly determined by lottery. It should be noted that the number of premonitory games to be selected may be set differently according to the specific combination that triggered the winning of the attack mode or the game state. This is the same for lottery processing for the number of other precursor games.

In step S809, based on the processing result of step S808, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends and it is notified that the transfer lottery has been won.

In step S810, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the sub-controller 81 is executed. The portent command includes the result of the lottery that triggered the portent mode (the display mode to be shifted after the portent mode, the attack mode in the case of step S810) and information on the number of portent games. Processing on the side of the sub-controller 81 based on reception of the precursor command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S810, the first special combination process is terminated.

Further, when the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first special combination processing is terminated as it is without setting the number of precursory games. If the bonus winning flag is set, it means that you won a specific role in the carryover state of the 1st BB or 2nd BB and won the attack mode transition lottery, or a double role with a bonus (strong cherry overlap 1, 2, etc.) and wins the attack mode transition lottery. In this case, priority is given to the BB mode instead of the attack mode as the transition destination of the display mode.

If it is determined in step S805 that the attack mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, a challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a table for challenge mode lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . In the table for the challenge mode lottery, the probability of shifting to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the special combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries.

The case where step S811 is executed includes the case where the display mode is the challenge mode. In this case also, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S811, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. with a table. As in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be changed depending on whether the challenge mode is on or not.

In step S812, it is determined whether or not the player wins the challenge mode based on the result of processing in step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode has been won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If the game mode is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S814, a process of setting a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

In the subsequent step S815, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the first special combination processing is terminated. If not set, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S816, a process for setting the number of precursor games to the precursor counter is executed in step S817, and a process for setting a precursor command is executed in step S818. After that, the first special combination processing is terminated. The processing of steps S815 to S818 corresponds to steps S807 to S810.

If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, then in steps S819 to S823, a process for adding the continuation game of the challenge mode is performed. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S820, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is executed.

Here, the addition means adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the attack mode, and the added number of games corresponds to the value to be added to the number of continuous games. At step S820, the value to be added to the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

Specifically, in the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for the lottery for the number of added games in the challenge mode is obtained from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The table for the lottery for the number of additional games in the challenge mode is set so that the number of additional games increases according to the type of the specific role. For example, in Strong Cherry, 30 games are added to the challenge mode with a probability of 80%, and 50 games are added with a probability of 20%. Also, in weak cherries, 5 games are added with a probability of 80%, and 20 games are added with a probability of 20%.

In step S821, processing for adding the number of games in the challenge mode is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous games in the challenge mode (more specifically, a challenge mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S820. Perform addition processing. Then, in step S822, the process of setting the additional command as an object to be output to the sub-control device 81 is performed, and then the first special combination process is terminated. The add-on command includes information that the add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, and the target (challenge mode or attack mode) for the add-on. The processing on the side of the sub-controller 81 that receives the add-on command will be described in detail later. Notification (additional production) is performed.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process proceeds to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first special combination process is terminated. The challenge mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the conditions for adding the number of games in the challenge mode are satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode addition flag is set, the challenge mode is added when the bonus ends.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S702, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S706, then in step S707 a second special combination process is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S705, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S706, the third special combination process is executed in step S708.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Here, the case where the second special win process is performed means the state in which the player is in the second RT state and the VB mode is not won. The attack mode corresponds to the display mode in this case. In the second special winning process, a transition lottery is performed to determine whether the display mode should be transitioned to the VB mode. In addition, in the second special combination process, a lottery for promotion of the rank of the attack mode is carried out, and a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is carried out.

That is, in step S901, processing for grasping the rank of the attack mode is performed. As already explained, in the present embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and each rank has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S901, it is determined which of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode the rank of the current attack mode is.

At step S902, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the attack mode rank grasped at step S901 is acquired from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of special combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. In the VB mode lottery table for each rank, the probability of transition to VB mode is different as a whole, and the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. , so that the probability of transition to VB mode is higher in the third attack mode than in the second attack mode, so that the fourth attack mode is more likely to enter the VB mode than the third attack mode. is set so that the transition probability of

In step S903, the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counters acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 are used to perform a VB mode transition lottery. Then, in step S904, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S903 corresponds to VB mode winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, similarly to steps S807 to S810, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set, and if it is set, the second special combination processing is terminated. If not set, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S907, a process for setting the number of precursor games to the precursor counter is executed in step S908, and a process for setting a precursor command is executed in step S909. After that, the second special combination processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for increasing the rank of the attack mode.

In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105 a of the ROM 105 and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106 . A plurality of tables for the promotion lottery are provided according to the rank of the attack mode. Specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, and Three (the promotion lottery is not performed in the situation staying in the 4th attack mode) is provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of special combination. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Further, in the table for each attack mode, the table for the second attack mode has a lower promotion probability than the table for the first attack mode. The table for attack mode is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the rank of attack mode is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next rank.

In step S911, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S910 was promotion winning. If the player wins promotion, the attack mode promotion process is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten to a rank flag one level higher than the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank. After that, in step S913, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the sub-control device 81 is performed. The elevate command contains information about the attack mode to elevate to. Upon receiving the promotion command, the sub-control device 81 controls the display control device 201 and the sound source IC so as to perform an effect for the attack mode of the promotion destination rank. As the effect for the attack mode in the liquid crystal display device 65, for example, a different background color effect is set according to the rank of the attack mode. The display control device 201 is controlled to notify that the rank has been promoted, and to perform an effect for the attack mode with a background color corresponding to the rank of the promoted destination.

If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S913 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

That is, in step S914, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In the additional lottery process, tables for attack mode additional lottery are acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and counters for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . The attack mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, strong cherries win the additional lottery with a probability of 80%, and weak cherries win the additional lottery with a probability of 20%. Note that the winning probability may be varied according to the rank of the attack mode. Then, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. When it is determined that the additional lottery is not won, the process of the second special combination is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S916 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S917, and lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of added games in attack mode is acquired from various table storage area 105a of ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. The attack mode additional game number lottery table is set so that the additional game number differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the strong cherry, 20 games are added to the attack mode with a probability of 90%, and 80 games are added with a probability of 10%. Also, in weak cherries, 5 games are added with a probability of 95%, and 100 games are added with a probability of 5%.

In step S918, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this process, a value corresponding to the number of additional games drawn in step S917 is added to a counter that manages the number of continuous games in the attack mode (more specifically, attack mode continuous counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Perform addition processing. Then, in step S919, after performing the process of setting the additional command as an object to be output to the sub-control device 81, the process of the second special combination ends.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, the attack mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends while the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus.

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination process executed in step S708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The case where the third special winning process is performed means the state of the third RT or the state of the second RT and winning the VB mode. The display mode in this case corresponds to attack mode or VB mode. In the third special combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

That is, in step S1001, lottery processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S914. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1001 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the attack mode. Then, in step S1005, the number of games in the attack mode is added, and in step S1006, the additional command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 81. After that, the third special combination process is finished. The processing of steps S1003 to S1006 is the same as the processing of steps S916 to S919. The number of additional games may differ between the lottery process of step S916 and the lottery process of step S1004.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third special combination processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the attack mode addition flag is set in step S1007, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The attack mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the lottery process this time is not winning a special combination, the result of the lottery process this time is pushed out in step S709. It is determined whether or not the order replay or push order bell (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role") was won. In the case of winning the first prize, the first prize process is executed in step S710. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

After executing any one of steps S704, S707, S708 and S710, or after making a negative determination in step S709, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The specialized zone flag is a flag that is set based on the establishment of the seventh replay winning prize. Indicates a condition that occurs with probability. If the specialized zone flag is set in step S711, the specialized zone processing is executed in step S712. Such specialized zone flags, specialized zones, and specialized zone processing will be described later in detail. When a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, this lottery result corresponding process is ended.

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, when it is determined that a special role has been won, a lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, or processing for adding the number of continuous games in challenge mode or attack mode etc. When the lottery for transition to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition is won is notified after the premonitory game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for Transitioning Game State Based on Display Mode Transition Lottery Results>
(2) In the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in a prize-winning result handling process to be described later, and the number of precursory games is decremented by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the challenge mode. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. Then, in step S1104, a challenge mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, a challenge mode start command is set as an object to be output to the sub-controller 81. FIG. Upon receiving the challenge mode start command, the sub-control device 81 uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode is started. Such notification will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S1106, the counting of the number of continuations of the challenge mode is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is set in the challenge mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1106, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the attack mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. Then, in step S1109, an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The notification flag for attack is a flag for shifting the game state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the attack mode transition lottery. After that, in step S1110, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 81. FIG. The sub-control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the attack mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1110, this mode shift notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. Then, in step S1113, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1114, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 81. FIG. The sub-control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1114, this mode shift notification process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag has not been set, the mode transition notification processing is terminated.

That is, among the challenge mode, the attack mode, and the VB mode, which shift after the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes zero. On the other hand, in the attack mode and the VB mode, based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0, only notification of winning the attack mode transition lottery or the VB mode transition lottery is performed. Even if the number of games reaches 0, the attack mode and VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as a display mode does not involve the transition of the game state, while the attack mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the game state. This is due to the difference that VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to the attack mode or the VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is reported in the game in which the player wins the winning combination to shift the game state, It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the attack mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the attack mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S710) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of winning the winning order (push order notification effect) is mainly performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 and the push order notification section 68 . Here, a case will be described as an example in which the player wins the pushing order role when the operation order notified this time is middle→right→left.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), in the liquid crystal display device 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In addition, on the liquid crystal display device 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

In the pressing order notification unit 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, 68c arranged side by side corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the middle LED lamp 68b is lit, and the left and right LED lamps 68a, 68c are lit. turns off. As a result, the player can recognize that the middle stop switch 43 is the first stop switch to be operated in the current game. The pressing order notification section 68 may also be configured to notify the winning combination together with the pressing order by, for example, changing the color of the LED lamps to be lit. Also, in order to make it possible to recognize the stop switch to be operated second and subsequent times, the lighting color of the LED lamp corresponding to the second and subsequent operations may be changed or blinked.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

In the pressing order notification unit 68, the middle LED lamp 68b is turned off and the right LED lamp 68c is turned on (the left LED lamp 68a remains turned off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Larger button display. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

In the pressing order notification unit 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains turned off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification effect, the pressing order is displayed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. It is set so that the notification effect is executed. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification effect is executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. 44 can be desired, and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Pushing down process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 37, the pushing process executed in step S710 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described.

In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1201 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1202 to determine whether or not an attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM . As already explained, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the attack mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 35). be.

When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, processing for notifying the pressing order of the third re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). After that, in step S1204, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the sub-control device 81 is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The pressing order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the side of the sub-controller 81 based on the reception of the push order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1203, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is announced basically means that the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, and the winning announcement of the attack mode is performed via the sign mode. It is assumed that it will be after the attack mode has been completed and before the transition to attack mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even after the transition to the attack mode, the game state may fall from the second RT state to the first RT state. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the lottery result of this time is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1205 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1208, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, if the player wins the first promotion replays 1 to 4 in a state in which the lottery for transition to the attack mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the third. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for attack is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notifying the operation order corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. will transition from the second RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of transition to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the attack mode is not won and the game moves to the second RT state by chance, the game will quickly move to the first RT state after that.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1209 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 in step S1211. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the VB mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 35). be.

If the VB notification flag is set, a process for notifying the pressing order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed in step S1212. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1213, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, the processing for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed in step S1207, and the processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed in step S1208. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning the second promotion replay 1, 2 without winning the VB mode, if the attack mode is on, the push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and if the attack mode is not on. The press order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not the current lottery result is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1214 means that any one of the first re-game, third re-game, and sixth to eighth re-games wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, a process for notifying the pressing order of the sixth to eighth re-games is executed. Specifically, among the first regame, third regame, and sixth regame to eighth regame, the operation sequence corresponding to the sixth to eighth regame wins is notified (FIG. 23 ( c) see). After that, in step S1218, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, then in step S1207 the process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed, and in step S1208 the process of setting the pressing order notifying command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning BAR replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode, if the attack mode is on, the press order notification effect corresponding to the first replay win is performed, and if the attack mode is not on, the push order notification effect is performed. No forward notification effect is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the result of the current lottery is winning of the pressing order bell. If the pressing order bell is won, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. If it is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, in step S1221, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1222, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the actual pressing order process is terminated without performing the process for notifying the pressing order.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, as a result of performing the notification for shifting the game state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shift of the game state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S411) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1301, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continuous games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted.

In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third regame winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an attack mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. In addition to the attack mode flag, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the attack mode, the attack mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, when it is determined in step S1304 that the attack mode flag has been set includes the case of the attack mode, the VB mode, and the special zone. .

At step S1304, if the attack mode flag is set, the display mode is already the attack mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the attack mode flag is not set, processing for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

That is, in step S1305, an attack mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1306, an attack mode start command is set as an object to be output to the sub-controller 81. FIG. Upon receiving the attack mode start command, the sub-control device 81 uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1307, counting of the attack mode continuation number is started. Specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the attack mode. After performing the process of step S1307, the main winning result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1302 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

That is, in step S1311, processing for setting a VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that transitions through the attack mode, and the transition to the attack mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1312, the VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the sub-controller 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode start command, the sub-control device 81 uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1313, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 60) of the number of VB mode continuation games is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1313, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1308 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1314. In step S1314, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In the present embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the BAR symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the BAR symbol is at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the BAR symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the right reel 32R. When the BAR pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to move to the special zone for adding. In the addition specialized zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is increased not only for the specific combination but also for all winable combinations (advance order combination, specific combination and bonus). It should be noted that the case where the seventh re-game winning has been established means that the BAR replay 1 has been won and the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the operation order corresponding to the seventh re-game winning (Fig. 23). (c)) Furthermore, this is the case where the 7th replay out of the 1st, 6th, and 7th replays wins the lottery. A lottery for winning the seventh replay is won with a probability of 1.例文帳に追加

If the seventh replay win has been established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag has been set, then in step S1316, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-mentioned additional specialized zone, and when the specialized zone flag is set, the counting of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped. . In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the specialized zone shifts to the VB mode and always shifts to the VB mode after the specialized zone ends.

After that, in step S1317, a specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the special zone start command, the sub-control device 81 uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1318, counting of the number of continuations of the specialized zone is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1318, the main winning result handling process is terminated. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is terminated.

As described above, processing for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination (3rd to 5th replays) corresponding to shifting the game state. conduct. This is to avoid the attack mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, when the display mode is shifted, among those accompanied by the shift of the game state, the shift to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, or when shifting from the attack mode to the VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to a lower mode, the display mode transition is not performed when the game state transitions due to, for example, a second regame win as a fall replay or a stop of the transition result. When shifting to a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games played. Therefore, when shifting to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continued games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted. Then, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets from 1 to 3, and in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as the specific number. If the bet is not 3 bet, the game number management process is terminated. That is, in games with 1 bet or 2 bets, the number of games in the sign mode or the number of continuous games in the challenge mode or the like is not counted.

If the game to end this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If the determination in step S1402 is affirmative, in step S1403 the display mode flags of the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag are cleared, and then the number of games management process ends. do. In other words, when the bonus win flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the attack mode, etc., is not counted. Note that if each flag is not set in step S1403, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1403, while the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparation state such as an attack mode, these flags are used to notify the order of pressing for shifting the game state, so that the game state before the bonus can be restored.

If the determination in step S1402 is negative, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1405 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. .

That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is the challenge mode, the process advances to step S1407 to perform processing for subtracting 1 from the challenge mode continuation counter, thereby decrementing the number of continuation games in the challenge mode. Then, in step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and the challenge mode end command is set as an object to be output to the sub-controller 81 in step S1410. Upon receiving the challenge mode end command, the sub-control device 81 uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the challenge mode will end in the current game. After performing the process of step S1410, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1406 that the mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is the attack mode, the process advances to step S1412 to decrement the attack mode continuation counter by 1, thereby decrementing the attack mode continuation game number. Then, in step S1413, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. After that, in step S1416, an attack mode end command is set as an object to be output to the sub-controller 81. FIG. Upon receiving the attack mode end command, the sub-control device 81 uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the attack mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1416, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not set, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1418 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If it is not the special zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1419, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1420, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. After that, in step S1423, the VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the sub-controller 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the sub-control device 81 uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1423, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1418 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1424. In step S1424, the special zone continuation game number is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1425, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and the specialized zone end command is set as an object to be output to the sub-controller 81 in step S1427. Upon receiving the special zone end command, the sub-control device 81 uses the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like to notify that the special zone ends in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1427, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the game number management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is met, and when the bonus is to be terminated, processing for notification of winning such as an attack mode in which bonuses and duplicate winnings are performed, and an attack mode in which bonuses and duplicate winnings are performed. For example, processing for adding the number of games is performed.

That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. As already explained, during the bonus, the first small win (BB medium and small win 1) is established with a high probability (FIG. 28). In addition, when winning the BB middle red 7 matching combination (IV=29), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 30th minor combination winning (FIG. 27(b)), and further, When the lottery for winning the 30th minor combination out of the 1st minor combination and the 30th minor combination is won, the 30th minor combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, a lottery for winning the 30th minor combination is won with a probability of 1/100 in the case of winning the BB middle red 7 combination combination. When winning the BB middle BAR matching combination (IV=30), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of operation corresponding to the winning of the 31st minor combination (FIG. 27(b)), and further the 1st minor combination. When the lottery for winning the 31st minor winning combination among the combination and the 31st minor winning combination is won, the 31st minor winning combination is established. In the present embodiment, for example, a lottery for winning the 31st minor combination is won with a probability of 1/200 in the case of winning the combination of BAR in BB.

If it is determined in step S1501 that a minor win has been established, then in step S1502 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after the processing of step S1502 has been executed, the addition processing is executed in step S1503. The add-on process is a process for giving benefits other than payout of game media based on the result of the game during the current bonus. For example, if the game result of this time is the 30th minor winning combination (7 reds on the bottom row), if the display mode before the bonus shift is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode is won, and the normal mode or the challenge mode is selected. If the mode is other than the challenge mode, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added (for example, 100 games). In addition, when the 31st minor winning prize (all the lower BARs) is established, if the display mode before the transition to the bonus is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode and the VB mode are won, and if the attack mode is the VB mode. And the special zone is won, and in the VB mode, the special zone is won a plurality of times (for example, twice), and in the special zone, the number of continuous games in the attack mode is added (for example, 300 games). . In step S1503, a flag (attack mode win flag, etc.) corresponding to the transition of the display mode is set, and a counter addition process (attack mode continuation counter, etc. addition process) according to the number of additional games is performed.

In subsequent step S1504, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining payouts has become zero. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after a bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the sub-control device 81 in step S1505, in steps S1506 to S1519, processing for winning notification such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode win flag is set, the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1507, the number of precursor games is set in step S1508, and the precursor command is set in step S1509. The processes of steps S1507 to S1509 are the same as the processes of steps S808 to S810. After executing the process of step S1509, the end determination process is terminated.

That is, when the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode is won, after the bonus ends, the attack mode winning notification is performed through the premonitory game. Therefore, the game can be played while anticipating that the player will be in an advantageous state again after the bonus ends.

Here, if a bonus is won in any of the portent modes before notification of winning, the number of portent games has already been set when lottery processing for the number of portent games is performed in step S1507. In this embodiment, even in such a case, the number of precursor games is reset. That is, regardless of the number of games remaining when the bonus is won, the number of precursor games is again set to 1 out of 1 to 32 games after the bonus is completed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player feel excited for a long time after the end of the bonus.

If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1506, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, it is determined whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in step S1511. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated. That is, when the bonus ends in a situation where the challenge mode and the VB mode are also won, after the bonus ends, the premonition game is performed, and then the challenge mode and the VB mode winning notification is performed.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the attack mode addition flag is set. If the attack mode addition flag is set, the attack mode addition game number lottery process is performed in step S1513, the attack mode game number addition process is performed in step S1514, and an addition command is set in step S1515. . The processes of steps S1513 to S1515 are the same as the processes of steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1515, the end determination process is terminated.

If the attack mode addition flag is not set in step S1512, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the challenge mode addition flag is set. If the challenge mode add-on flag is set, the challenge mode add-on game number lottery process is performed in step S1517, the challenge mode game add-on process is performed in step S1518, and an add-on command is set in step S1519. . The processes of steps S1517 to S1519 are the same as the processes of steps S820 to S822. If a negative determination is made in step S1516, or if the process of step S1519 has been executed, the end determination process is terminated.

<Processing for specialized zone>
Next, the specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specialized zone processing is processing executed in step S712 in the lottery result handling processing (FIG. 31). As already explained, the player moves to the specialized zone during the VB mode, and during the specialized zone, the number of consecutive games in the attack mode is increased every game.

That is, in the special zone processing, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, a lottery process for the number of additional games in the attack mode is performed. In the following step S1603, processing for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. Then, in step S1604, after setting the add-on command, the processing for the specialized zone ends. The processing of steps S1602 to S1604 is the same as the processing of steps S917 to S919. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1602 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S917.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, (4) processing for notification effects performed by the sub-control device 81 will be described as processing relating to the notification effect on the sub side. As processing for various notifications, an effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, a process of storing the received command in RAM 84 is executed in step S1702. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 84, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can individually store a plurality of commands and can read out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S1701, or after the processing of step S1702 has been executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. The betting time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the betting operation being performed. In addition to the betting command set in step S207 of the normal processing, the mode transition notification processing (see 35), a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, and the like. In the case of these bet time commands, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or if the process of step S1704 has been executed, then in step S1705 it is determined whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third special combination process (FIGS. 32 to 34), push order notification commands set in the push order process (FIG. 37), and the like. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or if the process of step S1706 has been executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This command is set in the stop command response process in . In the case of each stop operation command, in step S1708, each stop operation effect setting process is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or if the processing of step S1708 has been executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stopped command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, attack mode start command, VB mode start command, specialized zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, special There is a zone end command and so on. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the process of step S1710 is executed, other processes are executed in step S1711. In step S1711, setting effects based on commands from the main control unit 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main control unit 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

After performing setting processing for various effects in steps S1701 to S1711, effect data setting processing is performed in step S1712, and then this effect setting processing ends. The effect data setting process is performed by setting display effect data (effect command) and sound effect so that the effect set by the sub-control device 81 is performed as a display effect by the display control device 201 and a sound effect by the sound source IC 85. This is a process of setting data (sound data) for

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described. It should be noted that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects shown in FIGS. The effect data setting process will be described after each effect setting process, but in the following description, the display effect performed when the data for display effect and the data for sound effect are set based on each effect setting process. and an outline of the sound effect will be described together.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The effect setting process at the time of betting will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode start command is included in the betting time command received this time. When the challenge mode start command is included, in step S1802, processing for setting the challenge mode start effect is performed. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the text "Challenge mode start" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65, and the display mode to be changed is likely to win the attack mode shift lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) indicating the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start presentation, a corresponding sound effect (for example, a loud male voice, "Take hold of the attack mode!") is emitted from the speaker device 64 .

If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the attack mode winning notification command is included, in step S1804, processing for setting the attack mode winning notification effect is performed. In the attack mode win notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55(a), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays characters "Attack mode confirmed". In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack number one!" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S1806, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Victory!" in male and female voices).

After executing any of the processes of step S1802, step S1804 and step S1806, or when a negative determination is made in step S1805, in step S1807, after setting other effects at the time of betting, this effect setting process exit. In the process of step S1807, for example, in response to the reception of a bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to inform that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1901, display mode setting processing is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, and in the corresponding display mode , the display effect of the liquid crystal display device 65 is set. Specifically, a challenge mode flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag are set in the various flag storage area 84b of the RAM 84 on the sub-control device 81 side as flags for grasping the display mode. Areas are provided in which a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end of each mode. For example, in the process of setting the challenge mode start effect in step S1802, a challenge mode flag is set. In step S1901, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is specified, and the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, the upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

Here, in the display mode setting process, if the display effects corresponding to the display mode have already been set, the display effects for the same display mode are not set again. That is, at the start of the game in which the display mode transition has been performed, the display effect corresponding to the new display mode of the transition destination is set. to continue. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate an increase in the processing load due to the display mode setting process being performed at the start of each game, and to set a new display effect by changing the display mode. It is possible to make it easy to recognize that the display mode has changed by the difference from the fact that the display effect of the previous game is continued by not shifting. It is also possible to associate the joy or disappointment of the transition of the display mode with such a difference.

In the subsequent step S1902, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of the winning of the pushing order, in step S1903, processing for notification of pushing order is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2002.

In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2003, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so as to perform notification of the pressing order in which the third replay winning prize is established. End the notification process.

If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005 to control the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, and the like so as to perform the push order notification that the first replay win is established. End the process.

If it is determined in step S2004 that the replays are not fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S1806, a notified flag indicating that the VB winning has been notified is set in the various flag storage area 84b of the RAM 84. FIG. The alerted flag is cleared upon transition to the VB mode. Then, in step S2007, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined. If it has already been announced that the VB mode has been won, in step S2008, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so as to announce the pressing order in which the fourth and fifth regame winnings are established. Terminates the push order notification process. If the VB mode winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2005 to perform the pressing order notification for the first regame winning prize, and then terminate the pressing order notification processing.

If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether or not the current lottery results are BAR replays 1 and 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, it is checked in step S2010 whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode by checking the mode correspondence flag. If it is in the VB mode, in step S2011, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so as to perform push order notification that the sixth to eighth regame winnings are established. End the process. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, and after notification of the pressing order for the first regame winning prize is performed, the pressing order notification processing is terminated.

If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2013, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the bell wins as the first minor combination, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the pressing order notification processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 44), if it is determined in step S1902 that the winning combination is not pushed, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not the special combination is winning. If the special combination is won, a special combination notification process is performed in step S1905. The special combination notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or if the processing in step S1903 or step S1905 has been executed, the process advances to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S1907, the process of setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an additional effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(b), the numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65 as "+10". In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “Kukyukyukyuuin!”).

Here, the processing for setting the additional effect in step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, a process of grasping the number of additional games is performed based on the additional command received this time. In subsequent step S2102, a notification timing lottery process is executed. In the notification timing lottery process, it is assumed that an additional effect will be performed in the current game, and it is a process of drawing lots at which timing in the game the additional effect will be performed.

The additional effect is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of additional games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 47, as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of the stop operation of the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of how the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position on the front side to an operating position on the back side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. Switch to HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released from the hand and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The additional effect is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. That is, in a game in which an additional effect is generated, the additional effect can be generated not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the execution timing table of the additional effect, when the number of games with a relatively small number of additional games, for example, 5 games to 10 games, occurs, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 50%. , the timing of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is 5%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 10%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 10%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop ON operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop OFF operation.

On the other hand, when the number of games with a relatively large number of games to be added is, for example, 100 games or more, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. is performed 20%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 10%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 35%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 10%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( (When all reels are stopped) is 20%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation.

That is, in the present embodiment, the additional effect for a larger number of games is more likely to occur when the stop OFF operation is performed than when the stop ON operation of each reel is performed. is set. Further, when comparing the first to third reels, the number of games with the largest number of stop operations (ON and OFF operations) on the second reel tends to be selected, and the game with the second largest number of stop operations on the third reel is selected. It is set so that it is easy to select the number of games in which the stop operation of the first reel is the smallest.

In this way, the number of additional games to be notified differs depending on the stop order, so that the expectation for the additional effect can be varied for each stop operation. For example, during a stop operation in which a large number of additional effects are likely to occur, it is possible to expect that the effect will occur. Specifically, during the stop operation of the second reel, especially the stop OFF operation of the second reel can be expected from time to time. In this case, for example, as a player who expects an additional effect at the time of the stop-off operation of the second reel, it is hoped that the player will calm down once before the stop-off operation of the second reel and that the additional effect will occur. At the same time, it is considered that the stop OFF operation of the second reel is performed.

In other words, if there is a possibility that a notification that the player will be advantageous if a predetermined operation is performed, the player will temporarily suspend the game before the predetermined operation, out of anticipation for the notification. However, there is a case where the predetermined operation is performed after making a reserve time and enjoying the reserve time to the full. By doing so, it is possible to fully enjoy the notification rather than receiving the notification that is advantageous without mental preparation. In that respect, as described above, by increasing the sense of anticipation at the time of the stop-OFF operation of the second reel, a time is created before the stop-OFF operation of the second reel, that is, at the time of the stop-ON operation of the second reel. becomes easier. In this way, in relation to the notification timing of the privilege to be obtained, it becomes easier to create a time to save in the middle of the stop operation.

Returning to the description of the setting process of the additional effect, after performing the notification timing lottery process in step S2102, it is checked in step S2103 whether or not the lottery result in step S2102 was when any reel was stopped ON. judge. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2104, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any one of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 84b is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 82 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. In step S2104, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area. conduct. When the CPU 82 grasps that the additional performance will be generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 82 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the first reel or the second reel is in the stop OFF operation. When these reels are to be stopped and turned off, in step S2106, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is stopped and turned off. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 84b is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 82 to grasp the timing of generating the additional effect. Also in step S2106, processing is performed to read effect data of an additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games from the effect data storage area and temporarily store the data in a predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2105, in step S2107, setting is made so that the current additional effect is generated when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 84b is performed. Also, in step S2107, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2104, step S2106 or step S2107, the setting processing of the additional effect is ended.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, if the addition command is not received in step S1906, or after the process of step S1907 is executed, the process for bonus notification is executed in step S1908, and in step S1909 Continuous effect setting processing is executed, after that, in step S1910, after setting other start time effects, the start time effect setting processing is ended. The bonus notification process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S1910, for example, a process of setting an effect suggesting the result of the lottery corresponding to the start of the game, turning off the lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted, and the like are performed.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stopping operation performed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2201, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2202 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and ON is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2204, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. An additional production will occur. Also, in this case, the speaker device 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, a display is made to indicate that the first reel is to be operated as shown in FIG. 36(a). . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 36(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the second reel is displayed as a stop target shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 36(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process advances to step S2205 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process advances to step S2206 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2207 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2208, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the liquid crystal display device 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker device 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the effect setting processing at each stop operation is ended.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the challenge mode end command is included, in step S2302, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the characters "Challenge mode end" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. FIG. In addition, in the challenge mode end presentation, the speaker device 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, "More diligence!" in a loud male voice).

If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the attack mode start command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the attack mode start command is included, in step S2304, processing for setting the attack mode start effect is performed. In the attack mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(a), the characters "Attack mode!! Ver.1" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. FIG. In addition, in the attack mode start rendering, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Attack mode start!" in a high-pitched female voice).

Incidentally, the display of "Ver. 1" in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, the display indicates that the attack mode to be started this time is the first attack mode. Then, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "Attack mode!! Ver.2" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65 as promotion effect. Also, when the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the character display "Attack mode!! Ver.3" is displayed, and when it is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the character display is "Attack mode!! Ver.4". display is performed.

If the attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the attack mode end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the attack mode end command is included, in step S2306, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed. In the attack mode ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56(b), the characters "Attack mode END" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65, and the current attack mode (VB mode, including the special zone) is displayed. ), and the total number of payouts for this attack mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode ending presentation, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, "See you later" in a high-pitched female voice).

If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. When the VB mode start command is included, in step S2308, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(a), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays characters "777 VICTORY!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "Victory bonus start").

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the VB mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. If a VB mode end command is included, then in step S2312 processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57(b), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays characters "VICTORY BONUS END", and at the same time, the number of continuous games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. The number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of attack mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on").

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2314, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58(a), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays characters "Add Challenge!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go" in a boy's voice).

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2316, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end effect, for example, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end effect, the speaker device 64 emits a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “Ku-kyu-kyu-kyuuin!”). In addition, it is preferable to change the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker device 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not the bonus end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2318, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the total number of payouts obtained during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to the attack mode, VB mode, or special zone, the attack mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed depending on whether the attack mode is appropriate, whether the challenge mode is appropriate, and the number of additional games.

After executing any one of steps S2302, S2304, S2306, S2308, S2312, S2314, S2316 and S2318, or after making a negative determination in S2315, the process proceeds to steps S2309 and S2319. move on. In steps S2309 and S2319, the display control device 201 and the sound source IC 85 are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed at step S1907 in the process of setting the effect at the start. Specifically, when the timing of occurrence of this additional effect is set at the time of full stop in the additional effect setting process (FIG. 46), as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the liquid crystal display device 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker device 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in steps S2310 and S2320, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the present effect setting process is terminated. In steps S2310 and S2320, for example, the sound source IC 85 controls the upper lamp 63 to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, or causes the speaker device 64 to emit a sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination. , and controls the sound source IC 85 so that the speaker device 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet during replay.

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the sub-controller 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 and the like. In addition, on the side of the sub-controller 81, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, a continuous effect and a bonus effect are provided as effects during various games. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, attack mode, challenge mode, VB mode, etc.), and the game is played a plurality of times (four times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which it is notified whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final game. The effect during the bonus is a effect performed in each game during the bonus state that is shifted based on the winning of the 1st BB or the 2nd BB.

The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

For example, as shown in FIG. 59(a), at the start of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, a display indicating the number of times the continuous effect is continued is displayed (in the figure, four stages are displayed corresponding to the continuous effect of four games). It shows the daruma dropping performance). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the first daruma drop is successful, It indicates that the continuous production will continue). If the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify that the continuous effect will end in the middle (for example, an effect that the daruma drop in the first step fails). ). The effect regarding whether or not to continue the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), at the start of the second game in which continuous effects are set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining three daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued (the figure shows the effect that the second daruma drop is successful, indicating that the continuous effect is continued). ).

As shown in FIG. 59(c), at the start of the third game in which continuous effects are set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining two daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued. ).

As shown in FIG. 59(d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous effect is performed (in the figure, one-stage daruma dropping effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is given as to whether or not the result was advantageous to the player (the figure shows the effect that the daruma drop in the final stage was successful).

As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is inherited and the effect of the next game is set, and the effect of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous effect (how many games are there until the end of the continuous effect).

Here, in each game of the continuous effect, whether or not the continuous effect continues to the next game is set so that the continuation rate increases as the game of the continuous effect progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, there is the highest possibility that the discontinuation of the continuous effect will be reported, and the more the game progresses, the lower the possibility that the discontinuation will be reported. Therefore, in the continuous effect, the player's level of interest greatly differs depending on what game the current game is in the continuous effect, and as the game progresses from the start game to the end game, the player's interest becomes high. .

The setting of the continuous effect is performed in the special combination notification process (step S1905), the bonus notification process (step S1908) and the continuous effect setting process (step S1909) in the starting effect setting process (FIG. 44). Therefore, each process will be described in order below.

<Bonus notification processing>
First, the bonus notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2401, based on the lottery result command received this time, it is determined whether or not the game to be started is a bonus winning game. If it is a bonus winning game, in step S2402, notification game lottery processing for notifying bonus winning is executed. In the informing game lottery process, it is decided by lottery after how many games the bonus win will be announced. Specifically, one notification game is determined from 0 games (announced in the current game) to 10 games. In the lottery for the notification game, the notification game may differ depending on the winning combination that triggered the winning (whether or not there is a duplicate winning, the type of minor combination that overlaps if there is a duplicate winning, etc.). For example, if the bonus is won with strong cherry overlap, a small number of games is likely to be selected, and if the bonus is won with weak cherry overlap, a large number of games is likely to be selected.

In subsequent step S2403, a process of setting the number of continuous effect games is performed based on the notification game determined by the process of step S2402. Specifically, in step S2403, a continuous effect game is set to the continuous effect counters provided in the various counter areas 84c. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is announced, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which 4 games are continuously produced, the continuous production is started in the game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and the result is notified in the game in which the continuous production counter is 0. More specifically, for example, when it is determined in step S2402 that bonus winning is notified after 10 games, 10 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous effect is started from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4. If it is determined in step S2402 that the bonus winning is notified after 5 games, 5 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. Even in this case, the continuous effect is started from the game in which the continuous effect counter is 4.

It should be noted that, when less than four notification games are set in step S2402, the continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, when it is determined in step S2402 that bonus winning is notified after two games, 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the third game of the continuous effect shown in FIG. 59(c).

After executing the processing of step S2403, in step S2404, a continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 84b. The continuous effect flag is a flag for the CPU 82 to grasp that the continuous effect is being executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or if the process of step S2404 has been executed, the process advances to step S2405. In step S2405, it is determined whether or not the bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to the game from the game after winning the 1st BB or 2nd BB to the end of the bonus. The affirmative determination in step S2405 means that the 1st BB or 2nd BB winning has been established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2406, the number of bonus effect games is set in the effect counter during bonus in the various counter areas 84c in the RAM84. The effect counter during bonus is a counter for executing an effect set for each game in accordance with the progress of the bonus game.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, in the first BB and second BB bonus games, winning is won in a combination in which 9 medals are paid out in each game, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. That is, the 1st BB and 2nd BB bonus games end after 24 games. The effect in the bonus game is set to be executed over 24 games, and the effect counter during the bonus is a counter for grasping which game of the 24 games the effect should be performed. is. Then, in step S2406, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games, and subtraction processing of the bonus effect counter is performed in each game of the bonus game. After the processing of step S2406 is performed, in step S2407, the during-bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage area 84b. The during-bonus effect flag is a flag for the CPU 82 to recognize that the during-bonus effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, or if the process of step S2407 has been executed, this bonus notification process ends.

<Special role notification process>
Next, the specific winning notification process executed in step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the portent command is not included, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not an additional command is included as the command at the start of this time. If the add-on command is not included, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the bonus has been won. If the bonus is not won, i.e., if the lottery result is a special combination win, and the lottery for transition to challenge mode, attack mode, or VB mode or the lottery for adding the number of continuous games is not won, In addition, if the bonus has not been won, in step S2504, lottery processing in the pseudo-prediction mode is executed. The pseudo sign mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the sign mode, but in the sign mode, based on the completion of the number of sign games, the player is notified of a result (such as winning the challenge mode) that is advantageous to the player. The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without informing the player of an advantageous result based on the completion of the number of pseudo precursor games.

In step S2504, a table for the pseudo-prediction mode lottery is obtained from various table storage areas of the ROM 83, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 84c, and a lottery is performed to determine whether the pseudo-prediction mode is to be executed. . In the table for the pseudo sign mode lottery, the probability of winning the pseudo sign mode lottery is set differently depending on the type of the winning specific combination. It is set so that the probability of winning the lottery in omen mode is high.

In step S2505, based on the processing result of step S2504, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the lottery has been won, in step S2506, lottery processing for the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is performed. This process corresponds to step S808 and the like on the main controller 101 side, and randomly determines the number of pseudo precursor games, which is 1 out of 1 to 32, by lottery. In subsequent step S2507, the number of pseudo precursor games determined in step S2506 is set in a continuous effect counter. In the present embodiment, when an omen mode or a pseudo omen mode is set, the omen mode or the pseudo omen mode is terminated after a continuous effect. By inputting the number of pseudo precursor games to the continuous production counter in step S2507, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursor mode corresponds to the start of continuous production (remaining four games), the continuous production is started. It will happen.

In step S2508, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 84b is executed. In the following step S2509, a continuous effect flag is set. After that, the special winning notification processing is terminated. Also, if affirmative determination is made in any one of steps S2501 to S2503, or if a negative determination is made in step S2505, the special combination notification process is terminated as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1909 of the start time effect setting process (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included in the start command currently received. When the precursor command is included, in step S2602, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command is input to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (remaining four games), the continuous effect is started. In the following step S2603, a continuous effect flag is set.

If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or if the process of step S2603 has been executed, the process advances to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2605. Then, in step S2606, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined whether or not the pseudo flag is set in step S2607. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2608 to acquire the effect data table for this sign from the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM83. Then, in step S2609, from the effect data table for this precursor and the continuous effect counter, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified, and the process of setting it as the current continuous effect is performed. The performance data of the continuous performance specified from the performance data table for the present sign is performance data indicating that the continuous performance continues until the next game if the continuous performance counter is 1 to 3. If the counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends with success.

If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, an effect data table for a pseudo sign is obtained from the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83. FIG. Then, in step S2611, from the effect data table for the pseudo precursor and the continuous effect counter, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified, and the process of setting it as the current continuous effect is performed. If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect data table for the pseudo precursor is effect data indicating that the continuous effect will continue until the next game or effect indicating that it will not continue. If the continuous performance counter is 0, it is performance data indicating that the current continuous performance will end in failure.

Incidentally, the effect data specified from the pseudo-prediction effect table when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 includes data for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data of the first game of effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second game of continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued to the next game in FIG. 59(b) is set. By doing so, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted in the game in which the number of pseudo-prediction games in the pseudo-prediction mode is 0.

After performing the processing of step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S2612. When the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. If the pseudo flag is not set, that state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after performing the process of step S2613, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

When it determines with the continuous production|presentation flag not being set in step S2604, it progresses to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether or not the effect flag during bonus is set. When it is set, in step S2615, subtraction processing of the during-bonus effect counter is performed. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the effect counter during bonus is performed. In the following step S2616, the effect data table for bonus is acquired from the effect data table storage area 83a. Then, in step S2617, from the effect data table for bonus and the during-bonus effect counter, the corresponding effect data of the during-bonus effect is specified, and the process of setting it as the present during-bonus effect is performed. In step S2618, it is determined whether or not the effect counter during bonus is zero. When the during-bonus effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the during-bonus effect flag is performed in step S2619. After that, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, lottery processing is performed on the side of the main controller 101 based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are activated. When the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are started to rotate and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding combination is selected. A plurality of RT states with different probabilities of being replayed as a result of lottery processing are provided in a configuration in which a privilege is given, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or falling replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay wins a prize is determined by the result of the lottery and the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the order of operation is performed according to the result of the lottery process, and the transition of the display mode. It is done by winning the lottery. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to win a prize for the pressing order bell and obtain medals. Then, by shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as a game state in which the replay probability is improved, and by shifting to the display mode in which the operation order is notified, in the RT state, the replay probability is improved. It is possible to achieve the winning of the order bell, and to obtain a large amount of medals.

<Production data setting process>
Next, the effect data setting process in the effect setting process (FIG. 42) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The effect data setting process causes the effect set in each process of steps S1701 to S1710 to be performed as a display effect by the display control device 201 (liquid crystal display device 65) and as a sound effect by the sound source IC 85. It is a process to make it happen.

That is, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not effects have been set in the processes of steps S1701 to S1710. More specifically, effect setting processing at step S1704, effect setting processing at start at step S1706, effect setting processing at each stop operation at step S1708, effect setting processing at all stop at step S1710, and other processing at step S1711. It is determined whether or not any one of various effect setting processes has been performed. When any effect setting process is performed, display data setting process is executed in step S2702. The display data setting process is a process for causing the display control device 201 to perform a display effect. In subsequent step S2703, sound data setting processing is executed. The sound data setting process is a process for causing the sound source IC 85 to produce a sound effect.

If a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after the process of step S2703 is executed, the effect data setting process ends.

The display data setting process and the sound data setting process will be described below.

<Display data setting processing>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, in the display data setting process, first, in step S2801, the effects set in the processes of steps S1701 to S1710 are grasped, and the address information corresponding to the grasped effects is specified. Execute the process. Specifically, the effect data table is acquired from the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83, and the address information of the effect command corresponding to the effect set this time is specified.

As shown in FIG. 62, the effect data table contains effect numbers (effect contents), effect commands to the display control device 201, and command address information indicating the storage locations of the effect commands in a one-to-one correspondence. are associated and stored. Therefore, the effect command to be output to the display control device 201 is specified by specifying the address information of the effect data table based on the effect content set this time.

For example, when the challenge mode start effect (step S1802) is set in the effect setting process at the time of betting, in step S2801, the effect number of the challenge mode start effect is grasped from the effect data table, and the effect number corresponds to the effect number. Identifies the command address information to be used. When the continuous effect is set in the effect setting process at the start, in step S2801, the effect number of the continuous effect corresponding to the value of the current continuous effect counter is grasped from the effect data table, and the corresponding effect number is obtained. Identifies the command address information to be used. Further, when the effect for the display mode is set by performing the display mode setting process in the effect setting process at the start, in step S2801, the effect number of the current display mode effect is grasped from the effect data table. and specify the command address information corresponding to the effect number.

In the following step S2802, a process of acquiring the effect command is executed based on the address information specified in step S2801. Specifically, based on the command address information specified in step S2801, a process of acquiring an effect command from the corresponding address in the effect command storage area 83d of the ROM 83 is executed. Then, in step S2803, after outputting the effect command to the display control device 201, the present display data setting process ends.

That is, the display data setting process is executed at the timing when various effects are set as one of the periodic processes (effect setting process) started periodically (2 msec) by the sub-control device 81, and the display data setting is performed. The effect command set in the process is also output to the display control device 201 at the timing when various effects are set in the periodic process.

<V Interrupt Processing of Display Control Device 201>
Next, V interrupt processing executed by the CPU 202 in the display control device 201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is a process executed when the CPU 202 detects a V interrupt signal. A V interrupt signal is a signal that the VDP 205 transmits to the CPU 202 . When the VDP 205 outputs an image signal for one frame to the liquid crystal display device 65, the VDP 205 starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display screen and arranges it on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output to dots, and image signals are sequentially output to dots from left to right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output for the dot in the lower right corner of the display screen. In this case, the VDP 205 outputs a V interrupt signal to the CPU 202 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and makes the CPU 202 recognize that the update of the image for one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 1/30 sec (approximately 33.3 msec). In this regard, the V interrupt process can be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal.

In addition to the V interrupt process, the CPU 202 executes a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, and a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sub-controller 81 . A detailed description of these main processing and command interrupt processing is omitted, but the effect command output from the sub-control device 81 is stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing.

In the V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 62, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received. Specifically, whether or not the effect command is output from the sub-control device 81 by executing the effect command output process in the display data setting process, and the effect command is stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process. determine whether If an effect command is stored, data table selection processing is executed in step S2902. A data table is a group of information that defines the processing necessary to display a one-frame image at each update timing when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65. be.

Incidentally, the output of the effect command on the side of the sub-controller 81 is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, whereas the V interrupt processing is performed in a cycle of about 33.3 msec. Production commands may be output. In this case, in steps S2901 and S2902, all the commands stored in the command storage area are checked for presence/absence of commands and data table selection processing is performed.

As shown in FIG. 62, the data table contains image data groups corresponding to the effect commands set on the sub-control device 81 side. For example, when the effect command C1 corresponding to the effect number 1 is received, the number of frames is p (p is a natural number), and Da(1) to Da(p) are used as data to be used. data table is selected. Further, when the effect command Cx corresponding to the effect number x (x is a natural number) is received, the number of frames is s (s is a natural number), and Dx(1) to Dx are used as data. A data table is selected in which (s) is used.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or if the process of step S2902 has been executed, the process advances to step S2903. In step S2903, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated so as to advance by one frame. This enables the CPU 202 to grasp the processing necessary to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time.

In the following step S2904, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time, the type of image data necessary for giving a drawing instruction to the VDP 205 is grasped, and parameters to be applied to the grasped image data are determined. perform calculations.

After that, in step S2905, after executing drawing list output processing, this V interrupt processing ends. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 205 . In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped by the immediately preceding task processing is to be drawn in the video RAM 207, and parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP 205 reads necessary image data from the character ROM 206 according to this drawing list, and sets the read image data in the frame buffer of the video RAM 207 with the above parameters applied. As a result, drawing data for one frame is created. An image signal is output to the liquid crystal display device 65 in accordance with the created drawing data, and an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65 .

For example, in FIG. 62, the data table corresponding to the effect number 2 is selected, and the data of Db(q-5) is used and displayed as the F(q-5)th frame image. In this case, the pointer update processing in step S2903 is performed so that the number of the data to be used is advanced by one frame. Then, by the task processing in step S2904, the data of Db(q-4) is grasped, and parameters to be applied to the grasped data are calculated. Thereafter, a drawing list for the data of Db(q−4) is created and transmitted to the VDP 205 by drawing list output processing in step S2905. As a result, the F(q-4)-th frame image is displayed on the display screen.

As described above, the image on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65 is updated by one frame each time the V interrupt process is activated in the display control device 201 at intervals of about 33.3 msec. That is, the display effect set as the display data setting process in the effect data setting process of the sub control device 81 is updated in the display control device 201 (liquid crystal display device 65) at a cycle of about 33.3 msec.

<Sound data setting processing>
Next, the sound data setting process executed in step S2703 in the effect data setting process (FIG. 60) of the sub-control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The sound data setting process is a process for performing sound effects in accordance with the display effects set in the previous display data setting process.

As already explained, in the present embodiment, the speaker device 64 for producing sound includes a plurality of sound source ICs 85, amplifiers 86, and individual speakers 87. controls the generation and output of sound. The sound data setting process is a process for instructing the sound source IC 85 about the sound data to be output in the current sound effect. After the sound data is instructed to the sound source IC 85 by the sound data setting process, the sound source IC 85 generates and outputs sound based on the instructed data.

The sound generation processing in which the sound generation and output are updated by the sound source IC 85 will be described in detail later. It is configured to be performed at a certain 10 msec cycle. In this case, the update cycle for one frame on the display control device 201 side and the update cycle on the sound source IC 85 side have a relationship of lengths that are indivisible from each other, and the timing of generating sound effects and updating the display effects. There may be a discrepancy between

More specifically, for example, when a predetermined sound effect is to be started in the second frame of the effect for a predetermined number of frames, if the start timing of the predetermined sound effect is set as the update timing of the sound source IC 85, the sound source IC 85 is updated. After about 33.3 msec, which is the update timing of the second frame, there is a difference of about 3.3 msec (about 33.3 msec−10 msec×3) from the update timing of the sound source IC 85 . Further, when a predetermined sound effect is to be started in the third frame of the effect for a predetermined number of frames, if the start timing of the predetermined sound effect is set as the update timing of the sound source IC 85, the above-mentioned third frame After about 66.6 msec, which is the update timing of , there is a gap of about 6.6 msec (about 66.6 msec - 10 msec x 6) or about 3.4 msec (10 msec x 7 - about 66.6 msec) from the update timing of the sound source IC 85. will occur.

In other words, in the case of the configuration in which the sound effect is set by the update data for each sound generation process of the sound source IC 85, even if the start timing of the sound effect is matched with the update timing of the frame, a deviation occurs. In this case, for example, a sound effect corresponding to the updated frame may be generated slightly behind the frame update timing, or a sound effect corresponding to the updated frame may be generated slightly earlier than the frame update timing. It will be done. There is a possibility that such a deviation will spoil the production effect.

In particular, as described above, in the present embodiment, the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 is of great interest, as the game is aimed at obtaining a large number of medals by changing the display mode as well as the game state. It can be said that it has been submitted. In that respect, the content of the display effect is grasped by the sound effect before the display effect (for example, whether or not the lottery for transition to attack mode is won is grasped by the sound effect before the display effect). If the display mode is changed or not, the production effect of the key part of the game, such as whether or not to switch the display mode, cannot be fully expected. The interest in the playability in this embodiment will be greatly reduced.

Therefore, in the sound data setting process according to the present embodiment, measures are taken so that there is no discrepancy between the display effect and the sound effect.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the sound data setting process, first, in step S3001, the process of grasping the contents of the current presentation is executed. More specifically, a process of identifying the effect number specified in step S2801 of the display data setting process is executed as the current effect content. In the subsequent step S3002, a process of grasping the value of the sound source counter K stored in the various counter areas 84c of the RAM 84 is performed. The sound source counter K is a counter for specifying the type of the sound source IC 85 for setting sound data in this process. The value of the sound source counter K corresponds to the number of the sound source IC 85, and in the processes after step S3003, sound data setting processing is performed for the sound source IC 85 corresponding to the sound source counter K grasped in step S3002.

That is, in step S3003, based on the effect number specified in step S3001, the sound effect data table stored in the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83 is read, and the sound is generated in the sound source IC 85 in this process. - A process of specifying a frame on the side of the display control device 201 (hereinafter referred to as a voiced data generation frame) to start outputting is performed.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the sound effect data table, each sound source IC 85 and a sound data generation frame are associated with each effect number and stored. For example, in the effect with the effect number 1, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w. Therefore, in the effect with the effect number 1, all the sound source ICs 85 start generating and outputting sound at the start timing of the display effect, and all the sound source ICs 85 start the sound effect. In the effect with the effect number 2, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c, while the fourth sound source IC 85d to the 23rd sound source IC 85w are: Speech data generation frame is not set. Therefore, in the effect with the effect number of 2, the sound effect is started in the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c at the start timing of the display effect, and the sound effect is started in the other sound source ICs 85d to 85w in any frame. No performance is performed. That is, although the first and second effects differ in the type and number of sound source ICs 85 used, the start timing of the sound effect is the same as the start timing of the display effect.

On the other hand, in the effect number 3, for example, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c, and the sound data generation frame is set as the second frame for the fourth sound source IC 85d. For the fifth sound source IC 85e, the sound data generation frame is set as the third frame. In addition, the sound data generation frame is set as the x-th frame for the sixth sound source IC 85f, and the sound data generation frame is set as the y-th frame for the 21st sound source IC 85v. Therefore, in the effect with the effect number 3, the sound effect by the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c is started at the start timing of the display effect, and the sound effect is started at the update timing of the next frame (update timing to the second frame). The sound production by the 4th sound source IC 85d is started, and the sound production by the 5th sound source IC 85e is started at the update timing of the next frame (updating timing to the 3rd frame). Further, the sound effect by the sixth sound source IC 85f is started at the update timing to the x-th frame, and the sound effect by the 21st sound source IC 85v is started at the update timing to the y-th frame. That is, in the third effect, the start timing of the display effect and the start timing of the sound effect may differ.

In step S3003, for example, if the current effect number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 1, it is determined that the sound data generation frame is 1 for the first sound source IC 85a. Also, for example, if the current effect number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, it is determined that the sound data generation frame is 2 for the fourth sound source IC 85d.

After the voice data generation frame is grasped in step S3003, the processing of grasping the voice data address after the voice data generation frame is performed in step S3004. The sound effect data table stores, for each sound source IC 85, a sound data number corresponding to the content of the sound effect to be performed after the sound data generation frame. For example, in the first effect, for the first sound source IC 85a, a sound effect based on the sound data of the number a is performed, followed by sound effect based on the sound data of the number a+1, followed by the sound data of the numbers a+2, a+3, and so on. , and so on are stored. Also, for the second sound source IC 85b, a sound effect is performed based on sound data number b, and sound data numbers are stored such as number b+1, number b+2, number b+3, and so on.

Each sound effect corresponding to each sound data number has a length of a predetermined period (for example, about 11.1 msec). After the sound effect of number a is performed over a period of time, the sound effect of number a+1 is performed continuously over a predetermined period, the sound effect of number a+2 is performed continuously over a predetermined period, and the sound effect of number a+3 is performed. Continuous sound generation/output is performed according to the set sound data numbers, such as production being performed.

The sound data number is for linking with the address information of the sound source data stored in the sound source data storage area 83 e of the ROM 83 . The sound source data is data for generating and outputting sound by each sound source IC 85 reproducing in sound generation processing, and is data for reproduction of music, voice, effect sound, and the like. As shown in FIG. 66(a), a sound data table is stored in the sound data table storage area 83b of the ROM 83. In the sound data table, the sound data number and the address information of the sound source data are paired. 1 are associated with each other and stored. Based on the sound source data address information, each sound source IC 85 obtains the corresponding sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e shown in FIG. can be done through That is, the sound data numbers are set continuously as described above, and the sound data numbers are set in association with the sound source data, and the sound source IC 85 continuously acquires the sound source data for reproduction. and reproduces sound source data (generates/outputs sound) in the order in which it was acquired.

Here, volume information is also stored in the sound source data storage area 83e together with the sound source data. That is, in the sound source data storage area 83e, the output frequency and the like (pitch, tone type, etc.) as sound source data and the output sound volume as volume information are stored as a set. A value from 1 to 139 is set for the volume information, and the higher the value, the higher the output sound volume. Each sound source IC 85 can also acquire volume information when acquiring sound source data based on the sound source data address information, and performs sound production at the corresponding volume.

In step S3004, based on the sound effect data table, the sound data numbers after the sound data generation frame are obtained, and based on the obtained sound data numbers, the sound source data address information is grasped from the sound data table. .

For example, in step S3004, if the current effect number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 1, then the first sound source IC 85a is numbered c, c, c, a, a, etc. As sound source data address information corresponding to , information such as A(c), A(c), A(c), A(a), A(a), . Also, if the current effect number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, the sound sources corresponding to the 4th sound source IC 85d, number d, number d, number d, number d, number d, etc. Information such as A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), . . . is grasped as data address information.

In the subsequent step S3005, processing is performed to determine the number of frames up to the voice data generation frame. For example, in the case of effects No. 1 and No. 2, the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in each sound source IC 85 is zero. On the other hand, in the case of effect No. 3, although the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c is 0, the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the fourth sound source IC 85d is 1, the number of frames up to the voice data generation frame in the fifth sound source IC 85e is 2, and the number of frames up to the voice data generation frame in the sixth sound source IC 85f is x−1.

In subsequent step S3006, it is determined whether or not the number of frames ascertained in step S3005 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (150 frames, 5 sec in this embodiment). If the number is less than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S3007.

In step S3007, a process of ascertaining silence data addresses for the number of frames ascertained in step S3005 is performed. As shown in FIG. 66(a), in the sound data table, address information (B(x), B(y)) of silent data is set as a sound data address whose sound data number is x or y. It is Silent data is data (20 kHz in this embodiment) whose output frequency is equal to or lower than the lower limit of identification (20 Hz) or higher than the upper limit of identification (20 kHz) as sound source data, and data in which 0 is set as volume information. is. The corresponding reproduction length is different between the x-th silence data and the y-th silence data, and the reproduction length of the x-th silence data is set as the length of one frame (approximately 33.3 msec). . On the other hand, the reproduction length of the y-th silent data is variable, and the length is set in the subsequent processing (step S3011).

Here, when the sound source IC 85 reproduces sound effects by reproducing sound source data whose volume information is 1 or more, if the output frequency is equal to or higher than the identification lower limit value and is set to be equal to or lower than the identification upper limit value, the player can perceive the sound. On the other hand, even if sound source data whose volume information is 0 or sound source data whose output frequency is equal to or lower than the identification lower limit value or equal to or higher than the identification upper limit value is reproduced, the player cannot perceive the sound. Can not.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set sound data for reproducing sound source data outputting a sound that the player can perceive, and output a sound that the player cannot perceive or is difficult to perceive. It is possible to set the sound data in which the sound source data to be played is reproduced. Sound data (sound data) for reproducing sound source data outputting sounds that the player can grasp corresponds to normal information as sound information in the present embodiment, and cannot or is difficult for the player to grasp. Sound data (silent data) for reproducing sound source data that outputs sound corresponds to special information as sound information in the present embodiment.

In step S3007, as silent data corresponding to the number of frames up to the voice data generation frame, processing is performed to grasp the address information of which the sound data number is x and the sound data address information is B(x). Specifically, for example, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is 1, B(x) for one frame is grasped as the sound data address information. When the number of frames is 3, B(x), B(x), and B(x) for 3 frames are grasped as sound data address information.

In order to distinguish between sound data address information corresponding to silent data and sound data address information corresponding to sound data different from silent data, the former is referred to as a silent data address, and the latter is also referred to as a sound data address. .

In the subsequent step S3008, the silent data address ascertained in step S3007 and the sound data address ascertained in step S3004 are set in the area corresponding to the current sound source counter K in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84. process. That is, the data output area 84a has first to twenty-third areas set corresponding to the number of sound source ICs 85, and each sound source IC 85 stores sound source data based on the data address set in the corresponding area. Sound source data and volume information are obtained from the area 83e.

For example, if the current effect number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, two frames of B(x) and B(x) are grasped as silent data addresses, and sound data A(e), A(e), A(e), . . . are grasped as addresses. In this case, in step S3008, B(x), B(x), A(e), A(e), A(e) are stored in the fourth area corresponding to the value of the sound source counter K in the data output area 84a. ,,, and so on. In addition, when the current effect number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 22, the silent data address is not grasped, and the active data addresses are A(b), A(b), and A( b),,, are grasped. In this case, in step S3008, information such as A(b), A(b), A(b), .

If it is determined in step S3006 that the number of frames up to the speech data generation frame is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S3009. In step S3009, processing is performed to specify the update timing (processing timing) of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the voice data generation frame. For example, if the voice data generation frame is the 182nd frame, the length of the period until it is updated to the voice data generation frame is 181 frames×approximately 33.3 msec=approximately 6.0333 sec. In this case, considering the update cycle (10 msec) of the sound source IC 85, the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the voice data generation frame is 6.030 sec.

In step S3010, processing is performed to identify the length from the update timing of the sound source IC 85 identified in step S3009 to the start timing of the voice data generation frame (approximately 3.3 msec in the above example). Then, in step S3011, processing is performed to grasp the silence data address corresponding to the length specified in step S3010. That is, the silence data address B(y) corresponding to the y-th silence data whose length can be set is grasped for the length (approximately 3.3 msec) specified in step S3010.

In the subsequent step S3012, information (start timing information) of the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the sound data generation frame specified in step S3010, the silent data address grasped in step S3011, and grasped in step S3004 are obtained. Then, the sound data address and the data address are set in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84 in the area corresponding to the sound source counter K of this time.

After executing the process of step S3008 or step S3012, the process proceeds to step S3013. In step S3013, processing for adding 1 to the sound source counter K is performed. Then, in step S3014, it is determined whether or not the sound source counter K has reached 24, which is the upper limit. If it is 24, in step S3015, the value of the sound source counter K is reset to the initial value of 1, and then the sound data setting process ends. As a result, in the next sound data setting process, the sound data setting process corresponding to the first sound source IC 85a is performed. If it is less than 24 in step S3014, it means that there is still an unset tone generator IC 85. In this case, the process returns to step S3002 to repeat the process of setting sound data for the corresponding tone generator IC 85. .

By the sound data setting process as described above, the address information of the sound data corresponding to the current presentation is set in each area of the data output area 84a. An example of address information set in each area will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 shows the case where the effect number is 3.

For example, the first area corresponding to the first sound source IC 85a includes A(c), A(c), A(c), A(a), A(a), A(a), A(b), Address information such as A(b), A(b), . . . is stored. All of these address information are sound data addresses, and the first sound source IC 85a generates sound effects based on the sound data addresses from the start timing of the effect, that is, from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect. conduct.

On the other hand, in the fourth area corresponding to the fourth sound source IC 85d, B(x), A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), A(d), , and so on are stored. As already explained, B(x) is a silence data address with a length of one frame. Therefore, although the fourth sound source IC 85d generates sound from the start timing of the effect, the sound for one frame from the start timing is generated based on silent data, and the sound generated by such sound generation is not suitable for the player. Unable to comprehend or difficult to comprehend. Therefore, although the sound generation by the fourth sound source IC 85d is started from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect, the player perceives as if the sound effect is started from the display start timing of the second frame. be done.

Similarly, in the fifth area corresponding to the fifth tone generator IC 85e, address information such as B(x), B(x), A(e), A(e), A(e), . . Therefore, although the fifth sound source IC 85e starts generating sound from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect, the player perceives the sound effect as if it started from the display start timing of the third frame. be.

In the sixth area corresponding to the sixth sound source IC 85f, address information such as B(y), A(c), A(c)A(c), and sound generation start timing information are stored. The sound source IC 85 starts generating sound from this start timing. Also, as already explained, B(y) is a silent data address corresponding to the length of the start timing of the sound data generation frame and the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before that. Therefore, although the sixth sound source IC 85f starts generating sound at a timing slightly earlier than the display start timing of the x-th frame in the display effect, the sound effect is started from the display start timing of the x-th frame to the player. grasped as if

<Sound generation processing by sound source IC 85>
Next, sound generation processing executed by the sound source IC 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the sound generation process is a process that is individually executed by the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w, and is based on the setting of new data in the data output area 84a by the sub-controller 81. It is started and then executed at a predetermined cycle (10 msec cycle). In other words, the sound generation process is a process that is started periodically, and the trigger for starting the period is the execution of the sound data setting process by the sub-controller 81 . Note that when a new sound data setting process is performed after the periodic sound generation process is started based on the sound data setting process being performed, the update cycle of the sound generation process is reset. be. That is, when a new effect generation opportunity occurs, the sound generation process is started at a new cycle. The activation cycle of the sound generation process by the sound source IC 85 is longer than the activation cycle (2 msec cycle) of the effect setting process by the sub-control device 81, and the activation cycle of the V interrupt process of the display control device 201 (33 .3 msec cycle).

Here, the sound source IC 85 can access the RAM 84 in the sub-controller 81, and more specifically, access the data output area 84a of the RAM 84. FIG. Therefore, when sound data setting processing is performed in the sub-controller 81 and various data are set in the data output area 84a, the data are not output to the sound source IC 85 by a command or the like, but are set in that area. state is maintained. That is, the sub-control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 can exchange data via the data output area 84a, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

Furthermore, the sound source IC 85 can access the ROM 83 of the sub-controller 81, and more specifically, access the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83. FIG. Therefore, when the sound effect is performed by the sound source IC 85, there is no need to output the sound source data (and volume information) to the sound source IC 85 by a command or the like, and the sound source IC 85 stores the sound source data (and volume information). No need arises. As a result, it is possible to dramatically simplify the processing configuration when generating sound information, and also to simplify the configuration of the sound source IC 85 itself.

In step S3101, it is determined whether start timing information is set in the data output area 84a. If the start timing information is set, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the start timing of the current sound generation process corresponds to the start timing information. If it is not the start timing, the sound generation process is terminated. If the start timing information is not set in step S3101, or if it is determined that it is the start timing in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103.

In step S3103, a process of grasping the sound data address set in the data output area 84a is performed. In subsequent step S3104, a process of acquiring sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e is executed based on the sound data address. In the subsequent step S3105, processing for acquiring volume information from the sound source data storage area 83e is executed based on the sound data address.

After grasping the sound source data and volume information for the current presentation set in the sound data setting process in steps S3104 and S3105, a process of grasping the set volume information is executed in step S3106. The process of step S3106 is a process of grasping the set values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 connected to the sub-controller 81. FIG.

Incidentally, when the setting values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 are changed or initialized, for example, the corresponding counter values in the various counter areas 84c of the RAM 84 are changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the counter value of the area 84c can be grasped, and the counter value is grasped in step S3106. Further, when the setting values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 are changed or initialized, the values may be output to the sound source IC 85 . Further, the Vol switches 75 and 76 may be directly or indirectly connected to the sound source IC 85 .

After that, in step S3107, sound generation control via the amplifier 86 and speaker 87 is performed based on the sound source data acquired in step S3104 and the output amount of sound grasped in steps S3105 and S3106. After executing the process of step S3107, the sound generation process ends.

Here, the difference between the sound source data when 0 is set as the volume information and the sound source data when 1 to 139 is set as the volume information will be supplementarily explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 69(a) shows the relationship between sound source data and setting values of each Vol switch when 0 is set as volume information, and FIG. 69(b) shows values from 1 to 139 as volume information. It shows the relationship between the sound source data and the set values of the Vol switches when a is set.

As already explained, in this embodiment, the first Vol switch 75 mainly for the manager of the game hall and the second Vol switch 76 mainly for the players are provided. volume can also be set. For the first Vol switch 75, the volume can be set in 10 steps from 0 to 9, and for the second Vol switch 76, the volume can be set in 10 steps from 1 to 10. Regardless of the volume setting by either of the Vol switches 75 and 76, the larger the set value, the louder the sound output.

When volume information is set to 0 as sound data, as shown in FIG. 69(a), sound generation processing is performed regardless of the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 and the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76. However, the player cannot comprehend such sounds. In other words, for sound source data whose volume information is set to 0, a sound that cannot be perceived by the player is output regardless of the volume settings of the Vol switches 75 and 76 . In other words, no sound is output.

When the volume information is set as a as the sound source data, as shown in FIG. (In the figure, a value obtained by integrating both set values and the output volume value of the sound data is shown) is output. However, when the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 is 0, regardless of the volume information or the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76, a sound that the player cannot perceive is output. In other words, no sound is output.

The volume setting 0 of the first Vol switch 75 is used when the manager of the game hall or the like adjusts the game machine. The first Vol switch 75 has a volume setting of 0, whereas the second Vol switch 76 has no volume setting of 0. For example, an act of preventing the manager of the game hall from recognizing the error sound, or preventing an illegal bonus winning from being detected, etc.).

<Relationship between sound effect and display effect>
Next, the relationship between the frame update timing in the display effect, the update timing of the sound effect, and the length of the sound data will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

When an effect opportunity occurs and display data (effect command) and sound data are set in the effect data setting process in the sub-controller 81 at timing t1, the display control device 201 starts frame processing from the timing t1. is started, and the tone generator IC 85 starts updating the sound generation process from the timing of t1.

As already explained, the frame update period is 1/30 sec, which is about 33.3 msec. On the other hand, the update cycle of sound generation processing is 10 msec. The update cycle of the frame and the update cycle of the sound generation process have a relationship that is not divisible by a natural number. Therefore, when the update of the frame and the sound generation process are started at the same time at the timing of t1, the update period of the frame and the update period of the sound generation process hardly match each other. For example, timing t3, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, has a lag of about 3.3 msec from timing t2, which is the update timing of the fourth sound generation process. Also, at the timing t5, which is the update timing from the second frame to the third frame, there is a difference of about 6.6 msec from the timing t4, which is the update timing of the seventh sound generation processing. There is a lag of about 3.4 msec from the timing t6 which is the update timing of . Therefore, even if an attempt is made to generate sound in the sound generation process so that the sound effect is started at the update timing of the frame, the sound effect may be started earlier or later by the difference in the update period. put away.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a deviation, sound generation processing based on silent data is performed before the update timing of the frame (sound data generation frame) for starting the sound effect. there is Specifically, for example, in the third sound source IC 85c of FIG. 70(e), the sound effect is started at the timing of t3, which is the update timing to the second frame. In this case, in the sound data setting process of the sub-controller 81, the silence data and the sound data are set so that the sound generation process based on the silence data is performed from the timing t1, which is the timing before the timing t3. set as a set. Further, in the fourth sound source IC 85d of FIG. 70(f), the sound effect is started at the timing of t5, which is the update timing to the third frame. In this case, in the sound data setting process of the sub-controller 81, the silence data and the sound data are set so that the sound generation process based on the silence data is performed from the timing t1, which is the timing before the timing t5. set as a set. By doing so, it is not necessary to perform the sound generation processing so that the sound effect is started at the timing t3 in the third sound source IC 85c or at the timing t5 in the fourth sound source IC 85d. At the timing of , it is only necessary to continue the reproduction of the sound data that has started before. As a result, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of a gap between the display effect and the sound effect.

Silence data set for the third sound source IC 85c is reproduction data of a length of one frame from timing t1 to timing t3, and silence data set for the fourth sound source IC 85d is reproduction data from timing t1 to timing t5. The reproduced data has a length of two frames up to the timing of . In this way, by making it possible to set the length of silence data in units of frames (a natural number multiple of the frame length), the processing configuration for setting silence data can be simplified. .

The relationship between the third sound source IC 85c and the fourth sound source IC 85d for which silence data is set and the first sound source IC 85a and the second sound source IC 85b for which no sound data are set (FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d)) is Regardless of the presence or absence of data setting, all sound source ICs 85a to 85d start reproducing sound data (sound generation by sound generation processing) from the start timing of the first frame. In other words, the sound source ICs 85a to 85d do not need to monitor the sound reproduction start timing, and an increase in the processing load on the sound source ICs 85a to 85d can be avoided.

In addition, comparing the amount of sound data of the first sound source IC 85a, which does not set silence data, and the third sound source IC 85c and the fourth sound source IC 85d, which set silence data, all of them are equivalent to the length from t1 to t10 (x (frame)), and the amount of data does not vary among the sound source ICs 85a, 85c, and 85d, and equalization of processing is achieved.

On the other hand, for the second sound source IC 85b that performs sound effects from the start of the first frame to the end of the second frame, only sound data for two frames is set, and sound data for the third and subsequent frames is not set. In other words, when there is a period during which no sound effect is performed, as in the case of the third sound source IC 85c and the fourth sound source IC 85d, and when the sound effect is performed after that period, no sound is generated in order to adjust the start timing of the sound effect. Although the data is set, even if there is a period during which the sound effect is not performed like the second sound source IC 85b, if the sound effect is not performed after the period, the start timing of the sound effect is adjusted. Do not set silence data because it is not necessary. By doing so, it is possible to avoid unnecessary data setting and reduce the amount of setting data.

In the relationship between the second sound source IC 85b and the fourth sound source IC 85d, the second sound source IC 85b performs sound production by sound generation processing based on sound data over the first frame and the second frame, and the fourth sound source IC 85d does not perform sound effects by sound generation processing based on silence data for these first and second frames, while sound effects are performed by sound generation processing based on sound data for the third to x-th frames. . That is, the second sound source IC 85b performs sound effects from the first frame to the second frame, and the fourth sound source IC 85d performs sound effects from the third frame to the x-th frame. A series of sound effects from the first frame to the x-th frame are performed by the IC 85d. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which a series of sound effects are performed by a plurality of sound source ICs 85, even if sound effects of the same length are performed, the structure can be realized by a single sound source IC 85 (for example, the first sound source IC 85a). Compared to , the sound output position and output direction are different, so that the sound effect can be enhanced. It is possible to prevent the sound from being interrupted or duplicated at the update timing), and it is possible to suitably realize the series of sound effects.

A fifth sound source IC 85e to a seventh sound source IC 85g in FIGS. 70(g) to 70(i) show patterns in which a series of sound effects as described above are realized by a plurality of sound source ICs 85. FIG. For example, the fifth sound source IC 85e executes sound generation processing based on the first frame of sound data during the first period, and the sixth sound source IC 85f executes sound generation processing based on the first frame of sound data during the first period. In addition, during the second period, the sound generation process based on the sound data of the second frame is executed. That is, the fifth sound source IC 85e and the sixth sound source IC 85f realize a series of sound effects over the first frame (the fifth sound source IC 85e) and the second frame (the sixth sound source IC 85f). Further, the seventh sound source IC 85g executes sound generation processing based on silence data of the first frame as the first period and the second frame as the second period, and the third period as the third period. Sound generation processing is executed based on sound data for three frames. That is, in addition to the fifth sound source IC 85e and the sixth sound source IC 85f, the seventh sound source IC 85g generates a first frame (fifth sound source IC 85e), a second frame (sixth sound source IC 85f), and a third frame (seventh sound source IC 85g). A series of sound effects are realized. In this way, by using silence data in a configuration in which sound is generated and output by a plurality of sound source ICs 85, a series of sound effects with different sound output locations and output directions can be prevented from being interrupted or overlapping. It is possible to achieve this while preventing the occurrence of

In the above embodiment, when the number of frames up to the voice data generation frame is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, silent data from timing t1 is not set like the eighth sound source IC 85h in FIG. 70(j). In this case, the update timing (t8) of the sound generation process immediately before the start timing (t9) of the sound data generation frame is specified, and the update timing (start timing information) of the sound generation process and the update timing are specified. to the start timing of the voice data generation frame (x-th frame) (silence data from t8 to t9), and voice data after the voice data generation frame (t9 to t10) voiced data) is set. In this way, when sound generation processing based on silent data can be performed over an excessively long period of time, the silent data to be set should be minimized rather than setting silent data for the entire period. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of setting data.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

A display effect and a sound effect are set in the effect data setting process in the sub-control device 81, and based on the setting, the display control device 201 performs the display effect and the sound source IC 85 performs the sound effect. In the configuration described above, the update timing of the display effect on the display control device 201 side and the update timing of the sound effect on the sound source IC 85 side are different, and these update cycles are in a relationship indivisible from each other. In such a configuration, it is difficult to synchronize the two update timings. For example, even if an attempt is made to start the sound effect at the update timing of the display effect, the difference between the update timing of the sound effect and the update timing of the sound effect causes a lag between the two effects. end up Therefore, in the above configuration, the silent data is set before the update timing of the display effect and the sound data is set from the update timing of the display effect, and the sound based on the silent data is set at the update timing of the sound effect. It was configured to start playback of By doing so, it is possible to start the sound effect based on the sound data at the update timing of the display effect while there is a gap between the update timings of both effects.

When setting silence data, the sound data generation frame on the display effect side is grasped, and the data amount and setting method of the silence data to be set are changed according to the grasp result. More specifically, as in the first sound source IC 85a to the seventh sound source IC 85g in FIG. 70, when the number of sound data generation frames is less than a predetermined number of frames, silent data is set from the start frame (first frame), As in the eighth sound source IC 85h in FIG. 70, when the number of frames is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, silent data is set from the timing of updating the sound effect immediately before the sound data generation frame. In other words, if you try to set too long silence data, the amount of data to be set will increase, and even though the amount of data is small, if you also have to set the start timing information, the processing load may increase. . By doing so, it is possible to maintain a balance between the amount of silent data to be set and the processing load.

When setting silence data from the start frame, it is now possible to set the length of the silence data in units of frames. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a deviation from the display performance with a simple configuration without requiring special processing for matching the length of the silent data with the update cycle of the frame.

A plurality of sound source ICs 85 are provided, and in sound data setting processing of the sub-controller 81, sound data for each sound source IC 85 is set, while each sound source IC 85 is configured to be able to execute sound generation processing individually. By doing so, after the sound data setting process is performed on the sub-control device 81 side, the execution of the sound effects can be entrusted to each sound source IC 85, and the sub-control device 81 side can generate new effects. It is possible to perform other processing, etc. in preparation for

In each production, the plurality of sound source ICs 85 are set so that the voiced data generation frame can be different. Then, the sub-controller 81 is configured to set silence data for each of the sound data generation frames. By doing so, it is possible to produce the effect of superimposed sound production by a plurality of sound source ICs 85 by using a simple sound deviation prevention mechanism using silent data.

In a configuration in which a plurality of sound source ICs 85 perform sound generation processing, one sound source IC 85 performs sound generation processing based on sound data at a predetermined timing, and the other sound source ICs 85 perform sound generation processing based on silent data at the same predetermined timing. Sound data of each sound source IC 85 can be set so that generation processing is performed. By doing so, it is possible to realize a continuous sound effect while causing the sounds from the sound source ICs 85 to overlap each other.

Sound data including silence data is set in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84, and each sound source IC 85 can access the data output area 84a. By doing so, when the sub-control device 81 issues a sound effect command to each sound source IC 85, there is no need to output a command, etc., which simplifies the processing configuration when exchanging information. Information omission can be suppressed.

Further, the data output area 84a is configured to set the address information of the sound source data as the sound data, and the sound source IC 85 is configured to acquire the sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83 based on the address information. . As a result, since raw data for reproduction (sound source data) is not set in the data output area 84a, the amount of information to be set can be greatly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of setting the sound effect.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment, silence data is set as sound data to be subjected to sound generation processing before sound data, but silence data is also set after sound data in this embodiment. FIG. 71 shows an example of the sound effect data table in this embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame in any of the sound source ICs 85 in the effect with the effect number p. For the first sound source IC 85a, sound data numbers indicating sound source data after the sound data generation frame are set as number a, number a, number a, number x, number b, number b, and number b. As already explained, when the sound data number is x, silence data (H(0)) having a length in units of frames is set. That is, in the p-th production, the first sound source IC 85a performs sound generation processing based on the a-th sound data from the first frame, then performs the sound generation processing based on the x-th silence data, and then b Sound generation processing is performed based on the sound data of the turn.

In the p-th effect, the second sound source IC 85b is set with x-th, c-th, c-th, c-th, and x-th sound data numbers indicating sound source data after the sound data generation frame. That is, in the p-th effect, the second sound source IC 85b performs sound generation processing based on the x-th silence data from the first frame, then performs sound generation processing based on the c-th sound data, and then x Sound generation processing is performed based on the silent data of the turn. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the first frame is set as the sound data generation frame, sound generation processing based on silent data may be performed from the first frame. In other words, according to the number of substantial sound data generation frames (in the case of the second sound source IC 85b, the second frame substantially corresponds), the sound up to the substantial sound data generation frame As data numbers, sound data numbers corresponding to silent data are stored in advance.

In the p-th production in FIG. 71, the third sound source IC 85c represents a modification of the second sound source IC 85b. That is, in the second sound source IC 85b, among the sound data numbers of x, c, c, c, and x, the sound data number of x after c is not stored, and the sound data number of c is not stored. After the sound generation processing based on the sound data corresponding to the sound data number is performed, the sound generation processing is not performed. Even in this way, although the total data amount of the sound data for the first sound source IC 85a and the total data amount of the sound data for the third sound source IC 85c are different, the same sound effect can be achieved. It is possible to demonstrate.

In the p-th production in FIG. 71, the fourth sound source IC 85d shows a substantially modified example of the sound data generation frame. That is, in the present embodiment, while the first frame is used as the sound data generation frame, the sound data number corresponding to the soundless data can be set in advance from the first frame. ) is not limited to the first frame, and may be a period corresponding to the frame in which sound generation processing based on voice data is performed. In the fourth sound source IC 85d, the sound generation process is substantially performed based on the sound data (sound data of number c) from the third frame. No sound data is set.

In the present embodiment, in the effect number q, the length of silent data set after the sound data is particularly different from the effect number p. For example, for both the first sound source IC 85a and the second sound source IC 85b, the first frame is set as the voice data generation frame, and the sound data number corresponding to the voice data from the first frame is set. there is Specifically, for the first sound source IC 85a, sound data numbers of number a, number a, number a, number a, number a, number y, number b, number b, and number b are set. As already explained, when the sound data number is y, silence data (H(0)) having a length shorter than the frame unit length is set. That is, in the q-th production, the first sound source IC 85a performs sound generation processing based on the a-th sound data from the first frame, and then performs sound generation processing based on the y-th silence data in the middle of the frame. After that, sound generation processing based on the sounded data of number b is performed.

In the q-th effect, the sound data numbers of c+1, c+1, c+1, b+1, a, y, b, b, and b are set for the second sound source IC 85b. As shown in FIG. 66, sound data No. c+1, sound data b+1, and sound data No. a have the same sound source data but different volume information. is set so that the volume gradually decreases in the order of Therefore, in the performance of number q, the second sound source IC 85b performs sound generation processing based on the sound data of number c+1 from the first frame, and then the volume gradually decreases. After that, sound generation processing based on the sounded data of number b is performed.

In the q-th effect, the first and third frames are set as the sound data generation frames for the third sound source IC 85c. As the sound data numbers, numbers a, a, and a are set, and after a data blank period, numbers b, b, and b are set. In this case, in the sound data setting process (FIG. 64), the first and third frames are grasped as the sound data generation frames in the process of grasping the sound data generation frames (step S3003). Then, in step S3006 in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of frames is 0 or more as a determination of whether or not the number of frames is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. That is, the determination in step S3006 in this embodiment is always affirmative. After that, in steps S3009 to S3012, silent data (No. y silent data) corresponding to the period up to the update timing of the third tone generator IC 85c immediately before the update timing to the third frame is set, and the start timing is set. is set as the update timing of the immediately preceding third sound source IC 85c.

FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between frame update timing, sound effect update timing, and sound data length in this embodiment.

When the p-th display effect and sound effect start at the timing of t11, all of the first sound source IC 85a to the fourth sound source IC 85d start to generate sound by the sound generation process. In this case, the first sound source IC 85a performs sound generation processing based on sound data, while the second sound source IC 85b to fourth sound source IC 85d all start sound generation processing based on silent data.

At timing t12, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, the sound data in the sound generation process of the first sound source IC 85a switches from voiced data to silent data. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation process of the first sound source IC 85a (the sound output from the first speaker 87a) is switched from a sound that the player can grasp to a sound that cannot be grasped (difficult to grasp). Also, at the same timing, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC 85b and the third sound source IC 85c are switched from silent data to sound data. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC 85b and the third sound source IC 85c (the sound output from the second speaker 87b and the third speaker 87c) is a sound that the player cannot comprehend (difficult to comprehend). to a comprehensible sound. As for the fourth sound source IC 85d, since the silence data is inherited from the silence data, the sound switching does not occur at the same timing.

At timing t13, which is the update timing from the second frame to the third frame, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the first sound source IC 85a and the fourth sound source IC 85d are switched from silent data to sound data. Therefore, the sounds generated by the sound generation processing of the first sound source IC 85a and the fourth sound source IC 85d (sounds output from the first speaker 87a and the fourth speaker 87d) are sounds that cannot be comprehended (difficult to comprehend) by the player. to a comprehensible sound. Also, at the same timing, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC 85b and the third sound source IC 85c are switched from voiced data to silent data, or the sound generation processing ends. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation process of the second sound source IC 85b (the sound output from the second speaker 87b) is switched from a sound that the player can grasp to a sound that cannot be grasped (difficult to grasp). By ending (stopping) the sound generation process of the 3 sound source IC 85c, no sound is output from the third speaker 87c. Then, at the timing of t14 when the third frame ends, the p-th effect ends.

When the q-th display effect and sound effect are started at the timing of t15, sound generation by sound generation processing is started in any of the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c. As for the first sound source IC 85a, the sound generation process based on the sound data is performed even after the timing t16, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, and the sound is generated before the timing t20, which is the update timing to the third frame. At timing t18, which is the previous timing and is during the display period of the second frame, the processing is switched to sound generation processing based on silent data. Then, at the timing of t20, the sound generation processing based on the voice data is switched again, and the sound generation processing based on the voice data is continued until the timing of t21.

The second sound source IC 85b is the same as the first sound source IC 85a in that it performs sound generation processing based on sound data from the start timing (t15) of the first frame to the timing of switching to silence data (t18). However, the voiced data (volume information thereof) is set so that the volume gradually decreases. That is, at timing t16, the volume is reduced by one step, and at timing t17, the volume is further reduced. Then, at the timing of t18, the process is switched to sound generation processing based on silent data, and the player cannot hear the sound completely. After that, it is the same as the first sound source IC 85a in that it switches to the voiced data at the timing of t20 and that the sound generation processing based on the voiced data is continued until the timing of t21.

As for the third sound source IC 85c, although the sound generation processing based on the sound data is performed from the start of the first frame to the end of the first frame, the sound generation processing is once terminated at the timing of t16 when the first frame ends. do. After that, the sound generating process based on the silent data is restarted from the timing t19, which is the execution timing of the sound generating process immediately before the timing t20, which is the update timing to the third frame. Then, at timing t20, the sound generation process is switched from silent data to sound generation processing based on sound data, and the sound generation processing based on the sound data is continued until timing t21.

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Silent data was set to be processed for sound generation after active data. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the amount of sound data and the reproduction length set in each sound source IC 85 by using silence data. When silent data is set to be the target of sound generation processing before sound data, the amount of silence data to be set is determined by the order of frames for generating sound data, while the target of sound generation processing is after the sound data. When the silence data is set such that the amount of silence data to be set is not defined by the sound data generation frame. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to set silence data after sound data in order to adjust the total data amount and the reproduction length. In other words, it is possible to adjust the amount of sound data to be set and the reproduction length depending on whether or not to set silence data after sound data.

Further, since silence data can be set after voice data, a plurality of voice data generation frames can be set. In other words, it becomes possible to set a plurality of start timings of sound effects in one sound source IC 85 . In such a sound effect having a plurality of start timings, if silent data is set between data with sound and data with sound, each sound source IC 85 can produce sounds based on the sound data without monitoring each start timing. It is only necessary to perform the sound generation processing sequentially, and the processing configuration can be greatly simplified.

Each sound data can be set so that the timing of switching between sound data and silent data in one sound source IC 85 and the timing of switching between sound data and silent data in another sound source IC 85 overlap. In a configuration in which sound effects are produced by a plurality of sound source ICs 85, even if an attempt is made to control the start and end of the sound effects by controlling the on/off of sound reproduction without using silence data, part of the control may not be possible due to the processing cycle. There is a possibility of misalignment. In particular, when one is turned off and the other is turned on, if the off control is delayed first or the on control is delayed later, a blank period of sound effect will occur. Conversely, if the OFF control is shifted later or the ON control is shifted first, the sound effects are unintentionally duplicated. In this regard, in the above configuration, silence data is used as a substitute for on/off control, so the sound source IC 85 does not need to grasp the timing at which the on/off control should be performed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience caused by the on/off control as described above.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, whether or not silent data is set depends on the type of presentation. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a type of effect that continues over a plurality of games, as an example of the type of effect.

As types of effects that continue over a plurality of games, there are, for example, a bonus effect shown in FIG. 73(a) and an attack mode effect shown in FIG. 73(b).

As already explained, the bonus state is set to end when a predetermined number of medals are paid out. The number of games to be played is a fixed number of games (24 games). In the effect during the bonus, the effect contents are set differently for each game, and the corresponding effect is set according to the number of games completed in the bonus state (in the continuous effect setting process of FIG. is set).

For example, in the effect during the bonus, the 1st to 5th games correspond to the opening effect, and the effect of congratulating the winning of the bonus (shifting to the bonus state) continues over the 5 games. Then, for the sixth to twelfth games, an effect for each winning BB is performed according to the type of bonus (1st BB or 2nd BB) that has been won/shifted. In the 13th to 19th games, an effect by winning display mode corresponding to the display mode in the game in which the bonus is won is performed. In the twentieth game to the twenty-third game, for example, the simultaneous winning of the attack mode and the VB mode is announced as a special effect. The twenty-fourth game corresponds to an ending effect, in which the number of medals obtained during the bonus is displayed.

The effect during the bonus is updated at the start timing of each game, more specifically at the operation timing of the start lever 41 . That is, for example, at the timing when the sixth game is started in a situation where the opening production is being performed, the opening production is updated to the production for each winning BB, and in the situation where the production for each winning BB is being carried out, the At the timing when the 13th game is started, the effect is updated to the winning BB-specific effect. Similarly, at the start timing of the 20th game, the effect by winning BB is updated to the effect by display mode at the time of winning, and at the start timing of the 19th game, the effect by display mode at the time of winning is updated to the special effect. Then, the ending effect is updated at the start timing of the 24th game.

As described above, the during-bonus effect is, of the effects that continue over a plurality of games, updated to a new effect at the time of the operation (start operation) for advancing the game. In other words, if the operation to advance the game that triggers the update to the new effect is not performed, the update to the new effect is not performed. If is not performed, it waits when the opening performance up to the fifth game is completed. More specifically, the display effect and the sound effect are not updated until the game start operation that triggers the update is performed. When the sound effect from the device 64 ends the sound effect corresponding to the frame at the end, the sound is no longer generated, and the effect becomes silent (it overlaps with other effects). the sound effect can be performed). Alternatively, the display frame remains the frame at the time of termination, and as for the sound effects, for example, predetermined music is repeatedly reproduced.

The effect during the attack mode is a effect set when the display mode shifts to the attack mode in the display mode setting process of step S1901. As shown in FIG. 73(b), after the opening effect from the start, the 1st turn effect, the 2nd turn effect, . The opening effect is performed over 15 seconds, and each subsequent turn effect is switched to the next turn effect after 15 seconds. In other words, except for the opening effect, the 1st turn effect to the 7th turn effect are performed in 105 seconds, and one round is set as a loop effect of 105 seconds. For each turn, for example, in the first turn, the face of the main character (female character) is displayed close-up. The effect is set, and the contents of the effect are set differently for each turn, such as the effect of the main character practicing a volleyball serve in the third turn effect.

In this case, in the effect during the attack mode, the update timing of each turn effect is performed according to the passage of time. For example, during the attack mode, even if the player does not perform a game operation (start operation or stop operation), the effect during the attack mode progresses with the lapse of time.

In other words, the effect during the attack mode is a effect that progresses with the passage of time among the effects that continue over multiple games, and a new effect is displayed at the time of the operation (start operation) to advance the game. is not updated, and once the setting is made, the effect continues until a transition to another display mode occurs.

Sound data setting processing in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In this embodiment, in step S3201, a process of grasping the contents of the present effect is executed. Such processing is the same as the processing of step S3001. In the subsequent step S3202, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect grasped in step S3201 is the loop effect. Specifically, instead of an effect in which the effect progresses based on the game operation like the effect during the bonus, the effect progresses based on the passage of time like the effect in the attack mode, and the effect is looped at a predetermined period cycle. It is determined whether or not it is an effect to be performed. If it is a loop effect, the process advances to step S3203 to perform processing for grasping the value of the sound source counter K. FIG. The processing from step S3203 to step S3216 is the same as the processing from step S3002 to step S3015. That is, in the case of the loop effect, as in the first and second embodiments, a process for preventing sound deviation due to setting silence data is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3202 that it is not a loop effect, that is, if the current effect is, for example, a bonus effect, the process proceeds to step S3217. In step S3217, a process of grasping the value of the tone generator counter K is performed to specify the tone generator IC 85 to be processed this time. Such processing is similar to step S3203 (step S3002). After that, in step S3218, the process of grasping the voice data generation frame is performed in the same manner as in step S3204 (step S3003). Perform processing to grasp the sound data address.

In subsequent step S3220, a process of specifying the timing of updating the tone generator IC immediately before the voice data generation frame is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S3210 (step S3009). Then, in step S3221, the timing specified in step S3220 is used as start timing information, and the start timing information and the information of the sound data address ascertained in step S3219 are stored in the data output area 84a for this time. A process for setting the area corresponding to the sound source counter K is performed. Then, in step S3222, update processing for adding 1 to the sound source counter K is performed, and in step S3223, it is determined whether or not the upper limit value (24) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S3223, the process returns to step S3217. If a positive determination is made in step S3223, in step S3224 processing is performed to reset the sound source counter K to the initial value (1), and then sound data setting processing is performed. exit.

As described above, by setting silent data during the loop effect, it is possible to efficiently eliminate the deviation especially when the display effect tends to deviate.

In addition, while silent data is set during loop effects, silent data is not set for effects whose update timing is set at the operation timing associated with the progress of the game. It is possible to reduce the amount. That is, for loop effects that are likely to cause deviation, the occurrence of the deviation is avoided, and even if deviation occurs, in the case where a new performance setting is made by the subsequent game operation, there is a slight deviation. Since the generation is allowed and the reduction of the data set amount is prioritized, it is possible to maintain a suitable balance between the performance effect and the processing load when performing various sound effects.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, the difference between the display effect and the sound effect has been described, but in the present embodiment, another difference between the effect and the sound effect will be described. Here, as another effect, a reel rotation effect by controlling the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

In this embodiment, in the reel rotation effect, a specific effect is set in which a specific sound is generated at the timing when a predetermined symbol reaches a predetermined position. For example, as shown in FIG. 75, the specific sound is generated from the speaker device 64 at the timing when the 16th "red 7" pattern of the left reel 32L as the predetermined pattern reaches the lower line L3 (lower stage) as the predetermined position. . In this case, as long as the left reel 32L is rotating, the specific effect is continuously performed, and a specific sound is generated every time the 16th "red 7" symbol reaches the lower line L3.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the rotation control of each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

As already explained, each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is individually controlled by driving the stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel is controlled by this excitation pulse. The excitation pulse is output pulse by pulse at step S106 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 14) of the main controller 101. FIG. As for the excitation pulse, one pulse is output at a cycle of 1.49 msec, which is the processing cycle of the timer interrupt processing. , the angle change for each timer interrupt process is about 0.714°. Also, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating at a constant speed, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate once at 750.96 msec (1.49×504).

As already described, the sound data update cycle in the sound generation process of the sound source IC 85 is 10 msec, which is indivisible by a natural number from the update cycle for one round of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Therefore, when trying to generate a specific sound at the update cycle of the sound generation process, a deviation of 0.96 msec per rotation may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a specific effect in which a specific sound is generated each time a predetermined pattern reaches a predetermined position, sound generation processing based on silent data is performed at a timing different from the timing at which the specific sound is generated. .

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing processing for specific effect in this embodiment. This specific effect start process is a process that is executed when the main controller 101 starts the rotation start process (step S402) of the reel control process (FIG. 18). For example, in the rotating effect process (step S401), it is executed when the special effect generating lottery is won.

In step S3301, a process of grasping the position of a predetermined symbol on the left reel 32L before the start of reel rotation is performed. Specifically, a process of grasping the amount of deviation from the 16th "red 7" symbol, which is the object of the special effect, from the number of the symbol stopped at a predetermined position (lower line L3).

In the following step S3302, based on the effect set in the rotation start effect, the process of grasping the period required for constant speed rotation and grasping the period from the start of rotation until the predetermined symbol reaches the predetermined position is performed. Specifically, taking into account the acceleration process at the start of rotation, etc., the process of grasping the period from when the constant speed rotation is reached until the symbol targeted for the special effect reaches a predetermined position is performed. In this case, for example, when a freeze effect involving the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is set in the rotation start effect, the symbol targeted for the special effect is placed at a predetermined position in consideration of the period. The period until arrival is grasped.

After that, in step S3303, the processing for outputting the sound effect command including the information of the period ascertained in step S3302 to the sub-control device 81 is performed, and then this special effect processing ends. The sub-control device 81 performs sound data setting processing based on the received sound effect command, and causes each sound source IC 85 to perform sound generation processing, thereby generating a specific sound in the special effect.

In this case, in the sound data setting process, silent data is set during the period up to constant speed rotation. After reaching the constant speed rotation, the sound data of the length of 24 pulses (35.76 msec=1.49 msec.times.24 processes) corresponding to one symbol when the predetermined symbol reaches the predetermined position, and 20 Silent data with a length of 480 pulses (715.2 msec) corresponding to the pattern is alternately set as a loop effect to be subjected to sound generation processing.

FIG. 77 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the symbol position on the left reel 32L and the sound data in the special effect.

When the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at the timing of t22, they reach constant speed rotation at the timing of t23 after an acceleration period. After that, at the timing of t24, the 16th "red 7" symbol as the predetermined symbol reaches the lower line L3. The predetermined symbol passes through the lower line L3 by the timing of t25, and the next symbol (the 17th "watermelon" symbol) reaches the lower line L3 at the timing of t25. Then, the predetermined symbol reaches the lower line L3 again at timing t26, which is the next arrival timing, and the next symbol reaches the lower line L3 at timing t27.

In this case, during the period from t22 to t24, silence data is set as sound data corresponding to the sound source IC 85 (represented as the n-th sound source IC in the figure) that performs sound effects in the special effect. Further, during the period from t24 to t25, sound data is set, and during the period from t25 to t26, silent data is set. Then, the sound data is set at the timing from t26 to t27, and after that, the sound data is set as a loop effect so that the sound data is set for each rotation cycle.

As described above, in performing sound effects synchronized with the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, by setting the silent data and the sound data according to the rotation period, the update period of the sound effects and the , it is possible to suitably execute the sound effect synchronized with the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R without changing the control mode of the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

In particular, when the sound effect synchronized with the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is used as a so-called eye-pressing assist to suggest that a predetermined pattern has reached a predetermined position, the sound effect and the reel rotation position are shifted. If this occurs, not only is there an inconvenience that the degree of attention is reduced due to the deviation, but also the sound effect that serves as an indicator becomes meaningless as an indicator when performing eye pressing based on the eye pressing assistance. On the contrary, the player will be disadvantaged. On the other hand, if the mode of reel rotation control is adjusted to the sound production side in order to avoid such a sound lag, a mistake in hitting will be induced due to the difference from the case where the hitting assist is not performed. Even if you try to perform sound effects by waiting for the predetermined pattern to reach the predetermined position without using silent data, you will be forced to change the update timing on the sound effect side. will be required. In this regard, if the silent data is used to synchronize with the rotation period as described above, it is possible to avoid the deviation with a simple configuration.

Further, as described above, the processing cycle of the rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R depends on the processing cycle (1.49 msec) of the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 101, whereas the processing cycle (10 msec) of the sound source IC 85 and are not divisible from each other, and are also indivisible from each other with the processing period (33.3 msec) of the display control device 201 . In other words, for example, as in the first to third embodiments, in synchronizing the display effect and the sound effect, even if the processing cycle is synchronized without using silence data, the present embodiment can be used. As described above, if an attempt is made to add a synchronous effect between the effect on the main controller 101 side and the sound effect, it becomes necessary to further synchronize the processing cycle. In this regard, by using silent data as in the above configuration, it is possible to easily achieve synchronization with the rendering of each processing cycle without changing any of the processing cycles.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be carried out as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied to each of the above embodiments individually, or may be applied to each of the above embodiments by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied.

(1) The sub-control device 81 sets the sound data for the sound source IC 85, and the sound source IC 85 performs sound generation processing based on the sound data, thereby realizing a sound effect. may control each amplifier 86 or individual speaker 87 based on the sound data.

(2) The processing cycle of V interrupt processing in display control device 201, the processing cycle of sound generation processing in sound source IC 85, and the processing cycle of timer interrupt processing by main control device 101 are not limited to those described above. It is sufficient that these processing cycles are different from each other. More specifically, if they are indivisible from each other, deviations are more likely to occur, and the benefits of applying each of the inventions described above can be obtained.

(3) In the sound data setting process, all the sound data for each sound source IC 85 are set, but the sound source IC 85 of the sound data to be set may be changed according to the effect content. For example, for the first effect, set sound data for the first sound source IC 85a to the tenth sound source IC 85j; for the second effect, set sound data for the eleventh sound source IC 85k to the twentieth sound source IC 85t;
In the case of the third effect, the sound data for the first sound source IC 85a to the fifteenth sound source IC 85 may be set so that duplication of the sound source ICs 85 to be set according to the content of the effect does not occur. may be duplicated. In these cases, it is preferable that the sound data generation frame of each sound source IC 85 is set differently. should be Further, for example, the 21st sound source IC 85u to the 23rd sound source IC 85w may be configured so as not to be used in normal times, but used as substitutes when a problem (failure, etc.) occurs in another sound source IC 85.

(4) In the sound data setting process, the sound data of each sound source IC 85 is individually set. It may be different from the sound source IC 85 that does not. That is, for example, sound data may not be set in this process for the sound source IC 85 for which the number of sound data generation frames is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of frames. In this case, if the sub-controller 81 temporarily stores the timing corresponding to the sound data generation frame for the sound source IC 85, and sets the sound data for the sound source IC 85 at a timing prior to the timing. good. By doing so, the sound source IC 85 does not need to wait for the start timing for the sound source IC 85 that sets the sound data after that. Also, by doing so, it is possible to set the sound data of each sound source IC 85 at different timings, and the decentralization of the setting process can avoid a temporary increase in the processing load.

(5) It may be configured such that whether or not silent data is set depends on the contents of the sound data generation frame in the display effect. For example, as a sound data generation frame, if the difference from the immediately preceding frame (for example, color tone, presence or absence of characters, character movement, luminance, etc.) is a predetermined value or more, silent data is set. If the difference from the frame is less than a predetermined value, no sound data may be set. It is thought that the greater the difference from the immediately preceding frame, the easier it is to notice the discrepancy between the sound effect and the display effect. , and for effects in which the deviation is difficult to notice, the deviation may be allowed without using silent data, thereby reducing the amount of setting data.

(6) A configuration may be adopted in which whether or not to set silent data depends on the content of the sound effect. For example, silent data may be set for an effect in which a sound effect is started when the volume information is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and no silent data may be set for an effect in which the sound effect is started when the volume information is less than the predetermined value. This is because it is considered that the louder the volume, the easier it is to notice the difference between the sound effect and the display effect.

In addition, an effect in which a sound effect is started with sound source data in a frequency band that is easy for the player to recognize, and an effect in which the sound effect is started with sound source data in a frequency band that is harder for the player to recognize than that frequency band are combined into silent data. may be set differently, silent data may be set for effects in frequency bands that are easy to recognize, and silent data may not be set for effects in frequency bands that are difficult to recognize.

(7) Silence data is sound data that cannot or is difficult to grasp the generated sound regardless of the setting values of the Vol switches 75 and 76. Regardless of the setting value, any sound data that the player cannot grasp the sound or it is difficult to grasp the sound, and depending on the setting value of the first Vol switch 75 for the manager of the game hall, the generated sound can be grasped. may be configured.

(8) Silence data is pre-stored with a length corresponding to the length of each frame or the length corresponding to the amount of deviation between the sound data generation frame and the sound generation process, but the length of the silence data to be stored is not limited to the above and may be of other lengths. Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which silent data of a predetermined length is stored in advance, a configuration in which the length can be changed each time may be employed. For example, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is known, it is possible to create silence data with the length of that number of frames each time, or the amount of deviation between the sound data generation frame and the sound generation process. is grasped, silence data having a length corresponding to the amount of deviation may be created each time. Furthermore, for example, silent data of a length of a specific period (for example, 0.01 msec), which is relatively short, is stored in advance, and silence data of the length of the specific period is stored in accordance with the grasped length. Silent data may be set so that repeated reproduction is performed. In this case, the length of the specific period should be set so that the frame length (approximately 33.3 msec) and the amount of deviation are divisible by natural numbers in the specific period.

(9) In the sound data setting process, the silence data and the sound data are set after specifying the sound data generation frame. A data set having a predetermined reproduction (generation) order may be prepared. More specifically, for example, in the first effect, sound generation processing based on silent data is performed over a first period, and then sound generation processing based on sound data is performed over a second period. A first data set of silence data and sound data is stored in advance, and for the second effect, sound generation processing based on the silence data is performed over a third period, and then the sound data is stored. A second data set of silent data and voiced data is stored in advance so that the sound generation process based on is performed over a fourth period. Then, in the sound data setting process for the first effect, the first data set is read and set in the data output area 84a, and in the sound data setting process for the second effect, the second The data set is read and set in the data output area 84a. In this way, there is no need to specify the sound data generation frame for each effect, and the processing when the effect occurs can be simplified. Note that each of the above data sets includes not only a pattern in which sound data is processed after silent data, but also a pattern in which sound data is processed after sound data. Alternatively, a repeating pattern of silent data and active data may be included.

(10) In the sound data setting process, the address information of the sound data is set in the data output area 84a, but the sound source data itself may be set. In this way, in the sound generation processing of each sound source IC 85, there is no need to acquire sound source data based on the address information, and the sound source data in the data output area 84a can be read out (reproduced). Processing on the sound source IC 85 side is simplified.

(11) Although sound data is exchanged between the sub-controller 81 and the sound source IC 85 via the data output area 84a, the sound data may be exchanged using commands or the like. Specifically, in the sound data setting process, a command including sound data (address information thereof) and sound source data to be set in the data output area 84a is output to the sound source IC 85, and the sound source IC 85 performs sound generation processing based on the command. may be configured to perform In this case, instead of the structure in which the sub-controller 81 and the sound source IC 85 are capable of two-way communication, a structure in which one-way communication from the sub-controller 81 to the sound source IC 85 is possible (two-way communication is not possible) may be employed.

(12) Bi-directional communication between the display control device 201 and the sub-control device 81 is not possible, and uni-directional communication from the sub-control device 81 to the display control device 201 is possible, but bi-directional communication is possible. configuration. In this case, the display control device 201 is configured to output the update timing (processing timing of V interrupt processing) to the voice data generation frame to the sub-control device 81, and the sound source IC 85 is synchronized with the update timing of the voice data generation frame. may be configured to start the sound generation process at . Even in this case, for example, for an effect in which there are a plurality of sound data generation frames, if the sound generation processing based on the silence data is performed before the sound data generation frame on the rear side, After the display control device 201 outputs the update timing to the sound data generation frame to the sub-control device 81 and starts the sound generation processing at that timing, the sound generation processing may be repeatedly performed on the sound source IC 85 side. Since there is no need to output such information from the display control device 201 to the sub-control device 81 at the later voiced data generation frame, the processing can be simplified.

(13) As silent data, sound data is set in which sounds that are difficult or unfamiliar to the player to grasp are output from the corresponding individual speaker 87 when sound generation processing is performed. It is also possible to set sound data in which a comprehensible sound is output, but a sound that is difficult to comprehend or cannot be comprehended due to interference with a sound output from another individual speaker 87 is output. That is, the sound data set for the first sound source IC 85 is referred to as first sound data, and the sound data set for the second sound source IC 85 is referred to as second sound data. In this case, the first sound that can be output by the sound generation process based on the first sound data and the second sound that is output by the sound generation process based on the second sound data are sounds that can be comprehended by the player. Although the first sound data and the second sound data are set so that One sound) is drowned out. Then, the first sound data is set in the first sound source IC 85 and the second sound data is set in the second sound source IC 85 so that the sound generation processing of the first sound data and the second sound data are performed simultaneously. configuration. Even in this way, if the sound generation process of the third sound that the player can comprehend is performed following the first sound and the second sound, the output start timing of the third sound can be determined by the sound generation process. can be set without depending on the update timing of

(14) The first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w may be classified according to the effect or application, and the sound source IC 85 for setting the sound data may be changed according to the effect or application. For example, the sound effect to be performed together with the display effect is configured to be performed by the first sound source IC 85a to the tenth sound source IC 85j, and the sound effect together with the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed by the eleventh sound source IC 85k to the twentieth sound source IC 85k. The configuration is such that the sound source IC 85t is used, and the 21st sound source IC 85u to the 23rd sound source ICw are used for the error notification sound effects. In the sound data setting process, sound data for the corresponding sound source IC 85 is set, while sound data for the non-corresponding sound source IC 85 is not set. This eliminates the need to set sound data even for the sound source IC 85 that is not used, thereby simplifying the processing.

(15) Although the sub-control device 81 controls each sound source IC 85, the display control device 201 may control each sound source IC 85, or the main control device 101 may control each sound source IC 85. good. Alternatively, each sound source IC 85 may be connected to each of the control devices 81, 101, and 201, and the sound source ICs 85 controlled by the control devices 81, 101, and 201 may be different.

(16) The sound source IC 85 is configured to start sound generation processing based on a predetermined performance opportunity. It may be configured to rewrite the sound data as the original data of the sound generation process being executed when it occurs. Specifically, the sound source IC 85 is configured to repeatedly perform sound generation processing at predetermined intervals (10 msec) after power is turned on, for example. If it is not the execution timing of the effect, the address information of the sound data that is the basis of the sound generation process is set to the address information of the silent data. In other words, the standby state is a state in which sound is being output based on silent data. Then, when a predetermined performance opportunity occurs, the sound data setting processing of the sub-control device 81 changes the address information of the silent data set in the data output area 84a to the address of the sound data corresponding to the current performance. It is configured to be rewritten to information. By doing so, the sound source IC 85 only has to repeatedly perform sound generation processing (sound output), and the configuration of the sound source IC 85 can be simplified.

(17) The effect performed together with the sound effect is not limited to the display effect and the rotation effect of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. It may be a light emitting effect using a light emitting unit such as. For example, by controlling the driving of a predetermined driving unit, the character object can be displaced between a first position and a second position, and the motion is displaced from the first position to the second position at a predetermined timing. set the performance. Then, a sound effect is performed so that a predetermined sound is generated at the timing of displacement to the second position. In such a configuration, if a configuration is adopted in which the gap that may occur due to the relationship between the drive cycle of the drive control of the predetermined drive unit and the update cycle of the sound generation process is compensated for by silence data, the timing of displacement to the second position can be achieved. It is possible to match the timing with which the predetermined sound is generated.

(18) In the configuration in which the sound effects and the rotation effects of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are performed together, sound generation processing based on silent data is performed except for the timing when the predetermined pattern reaches the predetermined position. For example, sound generation processing may be performed based on voiced data in which the set value of volume information gradually increases so that the volume increases as one approaches a predetermined position, or the volume decreases as one moves away from a predetermined position. Sound generation processing may be performed based on sound data in which the set value of the volume information gradually decreases so as to In these cases, it is sufficient that the sound generating process based on the silent data is performed at least at any timing before the predetermined pattern reaches the predetermined position. That is, regardless of the length of the silence data, it is sufficient that the gap between the rotation period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the generation period of the specific sound is compensated for by the silence data.

(19) In the configuration in which the sound effects and the rotation effects of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are combined, a specific sound is generated while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed. A configuration may be adopted in which the rotation and the sound effect are synchronized during the period until reaching (during the acceleration period). Specifically, it may be configured to synchronize with the sound effect in the freeze effect in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated at a low speed during the operation invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 or the like.

(20) When an effect command is output in the display data setting process in the effect data setting process on the sub control device 81 side, the display control device 201 starts updating the frame at the update timing of the subsequent V interrupt process. Therefore, it is conceivable that there may be a time lag between the start timings of the display effect and the sound effect. Therefore, for example, the V interrupt processing of the display control device 201 may be configured to start based on the reception of the production command (the same configuration as the sound generation processing on the sound source IC 85 side), or the display control device 201 and the sub control device 81 may After making two-way communication possible, the execution timing (execution status) of the V interrupt processing on the display control device 201 side is grasped in the effect data setting processing of the sub control device 81, and based on the grasping result, A configuration may be adopted in which the effect command is output and the sound data setting process is performed.

(21) In the sound data setting process of the sub-controller 81, each address information of the sound data number corresponding to the effect number is set in the data output area 84a, and in the sound generation process of the sound source IC 85, The sound source data is individually obtained based on the performance number, and the sound source data having the predetermined playback length are connected to generate the sound. The sound source data having the reproduction length of the entire presentation may be read out to generate the sound.

(22) In the sound data setting process, whether the silence data is set for each frame or the silence data is set by grasping the amount of deviation is configured to vary depending on the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame. , the number of such frames is not limited to the above (150). Further, it may be configured such that the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is different, or in addition to the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame, the content of the effect is varied.

(23) If the sound data generation frame is after 1/3 sec, which is the common divisor of the update cycle of the sound generation processing of the sound source IC 85 and the update cycle of the V interrupt processing of the display control device 201, then the common divisor It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which sound generation processing using silent data is performed on a frame-by-frame basis from a natural number multiple update cycle.

(24) In the sound data setting process, whether the silence data is set by the length of the frame unit or the length corresponding to the amount of deviation is set differently. It may be possible to set silence data with a length that is combined with the corresponding length.

(25) As an example of the effect during the attack mode as a loop effect, a structure was shown in which the effects of the first turn to the seventh turn are performed, and then the effects of the first turn to the seventh turn are performed again, but the overall effect is shown. does not need to be looped, just a part of it is looped. For example, the 1st turn production to the 7th turn production may be performed, then the 1st turn production may be performed, and after the 6th turn production is performed, the 1st turn production may be performed. Alternatively, the looped portion may be different for each loop. For example, after performing the 1st turn presentation to the 7th turn presentation, the 1st turn presentation to the 6th turn presentation may be performed, and then the 2nd turn presentation to the 7th turn presentation may be performed.

(26) In a configuration in which silence data is set as sound data for each sound source IC 85 to match the reproduction length of sound data for each sound source IC 85, the silence data is set after all sound data. good too. For example, the first sound source IC 85a finishes reproducing sound data at a first timing, and the second sound source IC 85b finishes reproducing sound data at a second timing after the first timing. By setting silent data from the first timing to the second timing as the sound data of the first sound source IC 85a, the reproduction end timings of the sounds of the first sound source IC 85a and the second sound source IC 85b are matched. can be done. In this case, it is also possible to set silence data for the second sound source IC 85b to a timing later than the second timing, and set that amount of silence data for the first sound source IC 85a as well. In addition to the above, when reproduction of sound data ends at a third timing later than the second timing for the third sound source IC 85c, the sound data of the first sound source IC 85a is reproduced from the first timing to the third timing. By setting the silent data up to the timing of , and setting the silent data up to the second timing to the third timing as the sound data of the second sound source IC 85c, the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source It is possible to match the end timing of the reproduction of the sound of the IC 85c.

(27) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(28) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine having a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In addition, a pachinko machine of the type in which a game ball is launched into a game area and a jackpot lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a starting prize opening, and an electric accessory is activated when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device. A pachinko machine that opens a predetermined number of times, a pachinko machine that generates a right when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device and wins a jackpot, a pachinko machine with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, a mackerel ball, etc. The present invention can also be applied to the game machine.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. (See, for example, JP-A-2008-295707). As a kind of effect, sound effect may be performed by sound generating means such as a speaker.” Regarding the background art, “Here, in the above-exemplified game machine, optimization of effect is required. There is still room for improvement in terms of sound production.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Based on the occurrence of a predetermined production opportunity, a predetermined production means (liquid crystal display device 65) executes a prescribed production by a prescribed production means (a function of executing a display data setting process by the sub-controller 81, a display a function of executing V interrupt processing by the control device 201;
Sound production means (sub A function of executing sound data setting processing by the control device 81, a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85);
A gaming machine comprising
a first updating means (function for executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) capable of executing update processing of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means in a first period (approximately 33.3 msec);
a second update means (a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85) capable of executing sound generation control by the sound generation means in a second period (10 msec) different from the first period;
with
The sound production means is
Setting means for setting sound information (sound data) of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means (a function of executing sound data setting processing by the sub control device 81),
The sound generation means sequentially generates the sound of the sound effect based on the sound information set by the setting means,
The setting means sets, as the sound information, special information (silent data) that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means, and the sound generating means corresponding to the special information. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be set so that sound generation is performed at least one of before and after a predetermined update timing in the first cycle.

In a game machine in which a predetermined effect in which update processing is performed in the first period is executed together with a sound effect in which sound is generated in the second period, the predetermined effect and the sound effect are executed separately, so processing is dispersed. However, due to the difference in cycle, there is a high possibility that there will be a gap between the update timing of the predetermined effect and the timing of sound generation in the sound effect. If such a deviation occurs, not only can the performance effect of the predetermined performance and the sound performance not be sufficiently expected, but the deviation will make the player lose interest, which is a factor that rather reduces the degree of attention. can be. In this regard, in the above configuration, the sound before or after the update timing of the first cycle is set so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to comprehend. In this way, it becomes possible to cause switching between sound and silence at the renewal timing of the predetermined performance, and it is possible to match the renewal timing of the predetermined performance with the start or end timing of the sound performance. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the sound effect.

The ``special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to comprehend the sound generated by the sound generating means'' means ``the sound generated by the sound generating means that is difficult or unidentifiable for the player. It may be expressed as "special information that becomes" or "special information in which no sound is generated by the sound generating means".

Also, the "sound generation means" may be referred to as "sound output means". In this case, the "special information" may be expressed as "special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound output by the sound output means".

Furthermore, "at least one of before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period" may be expressed as "at least one of immediately before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period".

Feature A2. Based on the occurrence of a predetermined production opportunity, a predetermined production means (liquid crystal display device 65) executes a prescribed production by a prescribed production means (a function of executing a display data setting process by the sub-controller 81, a display a function of executing V interrupt processing by the control device 201;
Sound production means (sub A function of executing sound data setting processing by the control device 81, a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85);
A gaming machine comprising
a first updating means (function for executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) capable of executing update processing of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means in a first period (approximately 33.3 msec);
a second update means (a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85) capable of executing sound generation by the sound generation means in a second period (10 msec) different from the first period;
with
The sound production means is
Setting means for setting the sound information of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means (function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81);
an output means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3008, S3012, etc. by the sub-control device 81) for outputting the sound information set by the setting means to the sound generation means;
with
The sound generation means sequentially generates the sound of the sound effect based on the sound information output by the output means,
The setting means sets, as the sound information, special information (silent data) that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means, and the sound generating means corresponding to the special information. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be set so that sound generation is performed at least one of before and after a predetermined update timing in the first cycle.

In a game machine in which a predetermined effect in which update processing is performed in the first period is executed together with a sound effect in which sound is generated in the second period, the predetermined effect and the sound effect are executed separately, so processing is dispersed. However, due to the difference in cycle, there is a high possibility that there will be a gap between the update timing of the predetermined effect and the timing of sound generation in the sound effect. If such a deviation occurs, not only can the performance effect of the predetermined performance and the sound performance not be sufficiently expected, but the deviation will make the player lose interest, which is a factor that rather reduces the degree of attention. can be. In this regard, in the above configuration, the sound before or after the update timing of the first cycle is set so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to comprehend. In this way, it becomes possible to cause switching between sound and silence at the renewal timing of the predetermined performance, and it is possible to match the renewal timing of the predetermined performance with the start or end timing of the sound performance.

Moreover, in the above configuration, the sound production means has setting means for setting sound information, and output means for outputting the sound information set by the setting means to the sound generation means, and the sound generation means Since the sound is sequentially generated based on the sound information output by the output means, the setting means can entrust the sound generation to the sound generation means after setting the sound information. and the sound generating means are also decentralized. By doing so, when a new performance opportunity occurs and sound information is to be set, there is a possibility that the setting processing based on the previous performance opportunity and the setting processing based on the new performance opportunity may overlap. can be reduced. In this manner, the processing of the predetermined effect means and the sound effect means is decentralized, and the sound effect means is also decentralized by the setting means and the sound generation means, thereby achieving the sound effect as described above. It is possible to avoid an increase in the processing load while adding a function such as adjusting the generation timing, etc., and to suitably execute the sound effect.

The ``special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to comprehend the sound generated by the sound generating means'' means ``the sound generated by the sound generating means that is difficult or unidentifiable for the player. It may be expressed as "special information that becomes" or "special information in which no sound is generated by the sound generating means".

Also, the "sound generation means" may be referred to as "sound output means". In this case, the "special information" may be expressed as "special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound output by the sound output means".

Furthermore, "at least one of before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period" may be expressed as "at least one of immediately before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period".

Feature A3. The setting means sets, as the sound information, normal information (sound data) that enables the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means, and the sound generated by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the normal information is set so that is performed before or after the special information with the predetermined update timing in between.

According to the above configuration, switching between the sound generation process based on the special information and the sound generation process based on the normal information occurs at a predetermined update timing. This makes it possible to match the predetermined update timing in the predetermined effect with the start or end timing of the sound effect.

Feature A4. The setting means sets, as the sound information, normal information (sound data) that enables the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means, and the sound generated by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the normal information can be set so that is performed after the special information.

According to the above configuration, the boundary between the generation of sound for special information that is difficult or impossible to grasp by the player and the generation of sound for normal information that can be grasped by the player is the update of the predetermined effect. Since the normal information is set after the special information at the timing, it is possible for the player to grasp the sound at the update timing. Therefore, it is possible to match the update timing of the predetermined effect with the start timing of the sound effect.

Feature A5. The setting means sets, as the sound information, normal information (sound data) that enables the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means, and the sound generated by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the normal information can be set so that is performed before the special information.

According to the above configuration, the boundary between the generation of sound for special information that is difficult or impossible to grasp by the player and the generation of sound for normal information that can be grasped by the player is the update of the predetermined effect. Since the normal information is set before the special information, it is possible to make it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound at the update timing. Therefore, it is possible to match the update timing of the predetermined effect with the end timing of the sound effect.

Feature A6. The setting means causes the sound generation means to generate the sound corresponding to the normal information for a specific period after the period in which the sound generation means to generate the sound corresponding to the normal information. In that case, the special information is set so that the sound generated by the sound generating means corresponding to the special information is generated for the specific period, and the sound generated by the sound generating means corresponding to the normal information is set after the specific period. is not generated, the special information is not set for the specific period.

According to the above configuration, when sound information is set in the order of normal information→special information, if the sound is generated in the order of normal information→special information→normal information, the special information is set, After setting the normal information→special information, if the sound of the normal information is not generated, the special information is not set. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the setting data.

Feature A7. According to any one of features A1 to A6, the first period is longer than the second period and has a length different from an integral multiple of the second period. game machine.

According to the above configuration, since the first period is not an integral multiple of the second period, the update timings of the first period and the second period are likely to be out of sync. If the configuration of feature A1 is applied to the effect of the period of such a relationship, it is possible to preferably eliminate the gap between the two effects (predetermined effect and sound effect).

As for the structure in which the second period is longer than the first period, the same effect as described above can be obtained by setting the second period to a period different from an integer multiple of the first period. be.

Feature A8. A display means having a predetermined display screen,
The predetermined effect means executes the predetermined effect by controlling the display means so that the frame image displayed on the predetermined display screen is updated in a first cycle. The game machine according to any one of A1 to A7.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is the display effect, and the frame image is updated in the first period. Generally, frame images are updated in a display effect by setting/updating each pixel that constitutes the display screen. need to change to In that respect, as described above, since the special information is set before or after the update timing of the frame image, it is possible to match the output start timing and output end timing of the sound in the sound effect with the update timing of the frame image. , the start and end timings of both presentations can be matched without changing the update timing on the frame image side.

Feature A9. start frame grasping means for grasping the start frame for starting the sound effect by the sound generating means among the predetermined effects (processing for grasping the sound data generation frame by the sub-control device 81: function of executing step S3004, etc.); with
The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the setting means sets the special information based on a result of grasping by the start frame grasping means.

According to the above configuration, by grasping the start frame of the sound effect and setting the special information according to the start frame, it is possible to match the start timing of the sound effect with the update timing of the start frame. It becomes possible.

Feature A10. Means (sound data table storage area 83b by sub-control device 81) for pre-storing the special information in the length of the first cycle unit,
The gaming machine according to feature A8 or feature A9, wherein the setting means can set the special information in terms of the length of the first cycle unit.

According to the above configuration, the special information is set in units (frame units) corresponding to the update period of the unit frame image. By doing so, it becomes much easier to adjust the length of the special information in matching the start/end timing of the sound effect with the update timing of the frame image, and the processing for matching the timing becomes simple. can be improved.

Feature A11. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A10, wherein the setting means can set the special information in a length shorter than the first cycle.

According to the above configuration, the amount of data to be set is reduced, and the flexibility of the length of the special information to be set is improved. Therefore, in order to eliminate the sound deviation, it becomes a configuration capable of coping with various deviations.

Feature A12. start frame grasping means for grasping the start frame for starting the sound effect by the sound generating means among the predetermined effects (processing for grasping the sound data generation frame by the sub-control device 81: function of executing step S3004, etc.); When,
period grasping means for grasping the length of the period from the update timing of the second period before the start frame to the start frame (function for executing the processes of steps S3009, S3010, etc. by the sub-controller 81);
with
Any one of features A8 to A11, wherein the setting means can set the special information with the length of the period grasped by the period grasping means (for example, about 3.3 msec) The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, the length of the special information can be minimized. By doing so, it is possible to match the start/end timings of the sound effect and the display effect while reducing the data amount of the sound information to be set.

Feature A13. start frame grasping means for grasping the start frame for starting the sound effect by the sound generating means among the predetermined effects (processing for grasping the sound data generation frame by the sub-control device 81: function of executing step S3004, etc.); When,
Means (sound data table storage area 83b by sub-control device 81) for pre-storing the special information in the length of the first cycle unit;
period grasping means for grasping the length of the period from the update timing of the second period before the start frame to the start frame (function for executing the processes of steps S3009, S3010, etc. by the sub-controller 81);
with
The setting means
a first means capable of setting the special information by the length of the first cycle unit;
a second means capable of setting the special information with the length of the period grasped by the period grasping means (for example, about 3.3 msec);
If the result of grasping by the start frame grasping means is a result that the start frame is earlier than a predetermined number of frames from the start of the predetermined effect, the special information is set by the first means, and the start frame is set. The gaming machine according to feature A4, characterized in that the special information is set by the second means when the result is that it is after a predetermined number of frames from the start of the predetermined effect.

According to the above configuration, if the number of frames up to the start frame is small, the special information is set with the length of the frame unit, and if the number of frames up to the start frame is large, the length corresponding to the amount of deviation is set. Special information is set. By doing so, for example, when the number of frames up to the start frame is small, the start of the display effect and the sound generation based on the special information can be matched to eliminate the need to wait for the start timing. The processing load can be reduced, and the amount of data to be set can be reduced when the number of frames up to the start frame is large.

Feature A14. Having a plurality of the sound generating means,
The setting means
The sound information can be set for each of the plurality of sound generation means,
The sound information to be set for the first sound generation means among the plurality of sound generation means is at least before and after the first update timing in the first period when the sound corresponding to the special information is generated. Let it be done on the one hand,
The sound information to be set for a second sound generating means different from the first sound generating means among the plurality of sound generating means is generated in the first cycle in the first period when the sound corresponding to the special information is generated. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that it can be performed at least either before or after a second update timing different from the first update timing.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration having a plurality of sound generating means, the timing at which the sound corresponding to the special information is generated differs depending on the sound generating means. By doing so, it is possible not only to increase the depth of the sound effect, but also to achieve the effect of the feature A1 at a plurality of update timings in the predetermined effect.

Feature A15. Having a plurality of the sound generating means,
The setting means
The sound information can be set for each of the plurality of sound generation means,
The sound information set for the first sound generation means among the plurality of sound generation means is set so that the sound corresponding to the special information is generated at a predetermined timing,
The sound information set for the second sound generating means different from the first sound generating means among the plurality of sound generating means can be grasped by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein the sound corresponding to the normal information (sound data) can be generated at the predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration having a plurality of sound generation means, the second sound generation means generates the sound for the normal information at a predetermined timing when the sound for the special information is generated by the first sound generation means. is generated. That is, at a predetermined timing, it is difficult or impossible to comprehend the sound generated by the first sound generation means, but it is possible to comprehend the sound generated by the second sound generation means. As a result, it is possible to comprehend any of the sounds, instead of making it difficult or impossible to comprehend the sounds in the predetermined production at a predetermined timing. It is possible to realize an effect in which sounds are continuously generated while the sounds generated by means are overlapped with each other.

Feature A16. As the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means, the predetermined effects from the first effect to the second effect are executed by performing the updating process by the first updating means, and after the execution of the second effect The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that a special effect (loop effect, for example, attack mode effect) for returning to the first effect is set.

In the above configuration, as the predetermined effect, a special effect is set as a so-called loop effect in which effects are executed from the first effect to the second effect, and then the first effect is returned to. In a gaming machine having such a special effect, once the special effect is set, it is only necessary to repeatedly execute the special effect. is remarkably reduced. Then, while the special effect is being performed, there is a processing allowance for performing other effects, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect of the effect. On the other hand, in a game machine in which such a special effect is set, if there is a gap between the update timing of the special effect and the start/end timing of the sound effect, the difference is cumulative for each loop. may increase to In this respect, as described in feature A1, the special information is set so as not to cause such a deviation, so that it is possible to preferably enjoy the effect of the loop effect.

Feature A17. When a specific event based on the game operation by the player (for example, the start of the game based on the operation of the start lever 41) occurs, the game progress means (the function of executing the normal process by the main controller 101) )When,
a first effect means (a function of executing a bonus during bonus effect by the sub-control device 81) capable of executing a predetermined first effect (a bonus during effect);
A second effect means (a function of executing an attack mode effect by the sub-control device 81) capable of executing a second effect (attack mode effect) different from the first effect;
When the specific event occurs during execution of the first effect, means for updating the first effect (decrement processing of the effect counter during bonus by the sub control device 81: function of executing the process of step S2615);
Means for updating the second effect based on the fact that the execution time of the second effect reaches a predetermined update cycle (function for executing processing for updating the effect during the attack mode by the sub-control device 81) )When,
When the first effect by the first effect means is performed, setting of the special information by the setting means is restricted, and when the second effect is performed by the second effect means , means for allowing the special information to be set by the setting means (function for executing the processing of step S3202 by the sub-control device 81);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, the first effect is set in which the effect is updated based on the game operation (specific event) by the player, and the second effect is set in which the effect is updated based on the passage of time. . A game operation by a player is performed at a free timing of the player, and therefore, a certain degree of freedom is required for updating the first effect. In this case, for example, even if the special information is set so that the start or end timing of the sound effect matches the update timing of the first effect, the special information may be updated at any timing as described above. Settings may be wasted. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the special information is not set for the first effect, but the special information is set for the second effect, the special information can be set as necessary. is not wasted.

Feature A18. As the predetermined effect means, a first predetermined effect means capable of executing a first predetermined effect (display effect) (function of executing display data setting processing by the sub-control device 81, function of executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201 ) and a second predetermined effect (rotating effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) different from the first predetermined effect (reel control processing executed by the main controller 101). and
As the first update means, a first specific update means (V interrupt by the display control device 201) capable of executing update processing of the first predetermined effect by the first predetermined effect means in a first specific cycle (approximately 33.3 msec) and a second specific update means capable of executing update processing of the second predetermined effect by the second predetermined effect means in a second specific cycle (1.49 msec) different from the first specific cycle. (Function to execute timer interrupt processing by main control device 101);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized by comprising:

A game machine has a wide variety of sound effects. For example, a set of display effects and sound effects is performed as a first predetermined effect, and a set of motion effects and sound effects using movable accessories is performed as a second predetermined effect. It is common to In such a configuration, if the update period of the first predetermined effect and the update period of the second predetermined effect are different, the design is changed by, for example, matching the update period of one of the effects with the update period of the sound effect. Even if it does, there is a possibility that there will be a gap with the sound effect due to the relationship with the update cycle of the other effect. In that respect, if the configuration of feature A1 is applied to such a configuration, it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of deviations using special information in relation to a wide variety of effects, and a large change in design can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the sound effect.

Feature A19. Operating means (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for performing a predetermined operation;
Driving means (function for executing reel control processing by the main control device 101) for performing the predetermined operation by driving and controlling the operation means at a predetermined drive cycle;
with
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the predetermined update timing occurs at the predetermined driving cycle of the driving means.

According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is the effect caused by the operation of the operation means, and the sound effect is performed in association with the operation of the operation means. While the action of the action means looks flashy and tends to attract the player's attention, if there is a gap between the action and the sound effect, the flashier the action, the more the player's attention. There is a high possibility that you will lose interest in Therefore, by setting the special information as the sound information as in feature A1, the start/end timing of the sound production is matched with the update timing of the production by the operation of the operation means, and the difference can cause the excitement to be lost. Therefore, it is possible to fully exhibit the performance effect of the operating means.

Feature A20. a plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction;
a display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the pattern for each of the surrounding bodies;
a starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the winding bodies when operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) that performs a lottery as to whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on the operation of the starting operation means;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) provided for each of the winding bodies and stopping the rotation of the corresponding winding body when operated;
Drive control means (reel by main controller 101) for starting circulation of each of the winding bodies when the starting operation means is operated, and stopping circulation of the corresponding winding body when the stop operation means is operated function to execute control processing) and
When the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at a valid position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function for executing payout determination processing by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The operating means are each of the revolving bodies,
The drive means is the drive control means,
The predetermined update timing is determined by the driving control means so that a specific pattern (16th "red 7" pattern) of a specific loop (left reel 32L) among the loops can be visually recognized through the display unit. The gaming machine according to feature A19, characterized in that the timing is controlled so that it is arranged at a specific position.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means conducts a lottery and starts the orbiting of the orbiting body, and when the stop operation means is operated, the orbiting orbiting body stops and stops. In a so-called slot machine in which a privilege is granted by a privilege granting means if the number corresponds to the result of the lottery, there are cases where a sound effect corresponding to the rotation of the revolving body is performed. It occurs at the timing when the specific pattern of the circular body is arranged at the specific position. In this case, the revolving body continues to revolve until the stop operation means is operated, and the sound effect is generated each time the specific pattern reaches the specific position. In such a configuration, if there is a gap between the timing of generating the sound effects and the timing of the specific pattern reaching the specific position, the gap increases cumulatively with each rotation of the circulating body.

In particular, for example, in a configuration in which the sound effect is performed for assisting in pressing a specific pattern, a player who is accustomed to the game can aim at a specific pattern without such assisting in pressing. is possible, and it is possible to perform an operation aiming at a specific pattern with a small number of revolutions of the looping body. On the other hand, players who are not accustomed to the game may try to aim for a specific pattern by relying on the sound effect as an eye-pressing aid, but they may not operate the stop operation means because they lack confidence in the operation. If he hesitates, it is considered that the number of turns of the orbiting body increases accordingly, and the above deviation may increase cumulatively. Then, even though the sound effect is for the player who needs the assistance, there is a possibility that the assistance will be hindered.

Therefore, as in the above configuration, the generation of the sound for the special information as sound information is performed before or after the timing at which the specific pattern reaches the specific position. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of any deviation from the arrival timing of the specific pattern.

Feature A21. A volume setting means (first Vol switch 75, second Vol switch 76) capable of setting the volume of the sound effect by the sound effect means in multiple stages,
The setting means can set normal information (sound data) that allows the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generating means,
The sound generating means is
when a first volume (sound setting 1) is set by the volume setting means, generating the sound so that the sound corresponding to the normal information has the first volume;
When a second volume (sound setting 9) that is louder than the first volume is set by the volume setting means, the sound corresponding to the normal information is generated so as to have the second volume. while
When the first volume is set by the volume setting means and when the second volume is set by the volume setting means, it is difficult for the player to grasp the sound of the special information, or The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, wherein the sound is generated so as to be unrecognizable.

According to the above configuration, by changing the set volume by the volume setting means, the volume of the sound for which the normal information is set is changed, but the sound for which the special information is set is regardless of the set volume. It becomes difficult or impossible for the player to grasp. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a phenomenon in which the start and end timings of the sound performance are matched with the update timing of the predetermined performance by setting the special information, but they are deviated depending on the set sound volume. can be done.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Sound reproduction means (sound source IC 85, amplifier 86, individual speaker 87 A gaming machine comprising a speaker device 64) including
The sound information generating means is
First sound information generating means for generating first sound information (for example, sound data from t11 to t12 in FIG. 72(c)) (for example, setting sound data for the first sound source IC 85a by the sub-controller 81 function to perform processing) and
Second sound information having the same reproduction period as the first sound information (for example, silent data from t11 to t12 in FIG. 72(d)), and third sound information following the second sound information (for example, FIG. 72 ( sound data from t12 to t13 in d));
with
Depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound,
A gaming machine, wherein a series of sounds can be reproduced by reproducing sounds based on the first sound information and reproducing sounds based on the third sound information by the sound reproducing means.

According to the above configuration, when reproducing a series of sounds based on the first sound information and the third sound information generated by the first sound information generating means and the second sound information generating means, the first sound information generating means It is not necessary to synchronize the reproduction timing of the sound information generated by the second sound information generating means with the reproduction timing of the sound information generated by the second sound information generating means, and a series of sound information can be produced with a simple configuration. It is possible to produce sound. For example, as a configuration for synchronizing the reproduction timing of the sound information generated by the two-tone information generating means, the second sound information is generated at the timing when the reproduction of the first sound information generated by the first sound information generating means ends. In the case of a configuration such as starting the reproduction of the third sound information generated by means, it is necessary to use a predetermined timer or the like. It may not be possible to start playback. Then, in such a configuration, following the generation of the first sound information by the first sound information generating means, if the third sound information is to be generated by the second sound information generating means, the reproduction of the first sound information will end. Even if there is a gap between the timing, the third sound information, and the reproduction start timing, and a plurality of sound information generating means such as the first sound information generating means and the second sound information generating means try to perform a superimposed sound effect. , there is a possibility that a sufficient performance effect cannot be obtained due to the deviation, or that the performance effect is rather reduced. On the other hand, with the above configuration, there is no need to use a timer, sound information can be handed over at a timing that does not depend on the timer update timing, and the effect of sound presentation by a plurality of sound information generating means can be sufficiently obtained. It is possible to obtain

Feature B2. Fourth sound information (for example, silent data from t11 to t13 in FIG. 72(f)) having the same reproduction period as the sum of the second sound information and the third sound information, and the fourth sound information following the fourth sound information 5 sound information (for example, sound data from t13 to t14 in FIG. 72(f)) and third sound information generating means (for example, setting sound data for the fourth sound source IC 85d by the sub-controller 81 function to execute processing),
It is difficult or impossible for a player to comprehend the sound depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the fourth sound information,
A series of sounds can be reproduced by the reproduction of the sound based on the first sound information, the reproduction of the sound based on the third sound information, and the reproduction of the sound based on the fifth sound information by the sound reproduction means. The gaming machine according to feature B1.

According to the above configuration, in reproducing a series of sounds based on the fifth sound information in addition to the first sound information and the third sound information, the first sound information generating means and the second sound information generating means Not only is there no need to synchronize the generation of sound information, but there is also no need to synchronize the generation of sound information by the third sound information generating means. That is, the configuration that can realize a series of superimposed sound effects by the first sound information generating means and the second sound information generating means of feature B1 is the first sound information generating means and the second sound information generating means. It is not limited to a set, and can be expanded to a superimposed sound effect by a plurality of sound information generating means such as a third sound information generating means, a fourth sound information generating means, and so on. It is shown that. In this way, when the number of sound information generating means is increased, if the structure for synchronizing the sound information generating means is adopted, the structure for achieving synchronization may be complicated by the increase in the number of sound information generating means. By using the configuration of B2, even if the number of sound information generating means is increased, it is possible to enjoy only the merit of superimposed sound production, and the configuration does not become complicated. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize a sound effect.

Feature B3. The first sound information generating means generates sixth sound information having the same reproduction period as the second sound information (for example, silent data from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72(c)) following the first sound information. can be generated by
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, wherein it is difficult or impossible for a player to perceive the sound depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the sixth sound information.

According to the above configuration, the reproduction period of the first sound information and the sixth sound information generated by the first sound information generating means is the reproduction period of the second sound information and the third sound information generated by the second sound information generating means. has the same length as That is, in a configuration in which sound information is generated by a plurality of sound information generating means, the length of the reproduction period of each sound information is the same. As a result, in order to decentralize the processing of generating sound information by a plurality of sound information generating means, the processing load of each sound information generating means can be balanced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the processing omission or the like due to uneven processing.

Feature B4. The first sound information generating means generates sixth sound information having the same reproduction period as the second sound information (for example, silent data from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72(c)) following the first sound information. further, the seventh sound information following the sixth sound information (for example, sound data from t13 to t14 in FIG. 72(c)) can be generated,
It is difficult or impossible for a player to comprehend the sound depending on the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the sixth sound information,
A series of sounds can be reproduced by the reproduction of the sound based on the first sound information, the reproduction of the sound based on the third sound information, and the reproduction of the sound based on the seventh sound information by the sound reproduction means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein:

According to the above configuration, the first sound information generating means reproduces the sound based on the first sound information, the second sound information generating means reproduces the sound based on the third sound information, and the first sound information generating means reproduces the seventh sound. A series of sound productions such as reproduction of sound based on information is performed. In this way, even after the sound information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound is set, the sound is reproduced based on the sound information that the player can grasp. , it is possible to effectively utilize each sound information generating means.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the sound reproduction means can start the reproduction of the sound information by each of the sound information generation means at the same time or substantially at the same time.

According to the above configuration, for example, in feature B1, the reproduction of sound based on the first sound information by the first sound information generating means and the reproduction of sound based on the second sound information by the second sound information generating means are performed simultaneously or started at approximately the same time. Although the first sound information and the second sound information are set to have the same reproduction period, by starting the reproduction at the same time as described above, the end timing of the first sound information and the end timing of the second sound information are matched, so that the reproduction end timing of the first sound information by the first sound information generating means and the reproduction start timing of the third sound information by the second sound information generating means can be made seamless. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the continuity of a series of sound presentations by each sound information generating means only by arranging the length of each sound information.

It should be noted that ``can be started at the same time or substantially at the same time'' means not only the case of being completely synchronously, but also ``reproduction of each sound information so that the amount of deviation is such that it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp. can be started".

Feature B6. Each of said sound reproducing means is provided corresponding to each of said sound information generating means,
The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein each of the sound reproducing means generates the sound information generated by each of the corresponding sound information generating means.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature B5, and such a configuration enables the effect of the feature B5 to be exhibited more effectively.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B6, wherein the sound reproducing means are installed such that at least one of the output direction and installation position of the reproduced sound is different.

According to the above configuration, even if the sound is the same, if the output direction and the installation position are different, the sound perceived by the player will be different. It is possible to increase the significance of playing back superimposed sounds.

Feature B8. a sound source information storage means (sound source data storage area 83e) for storing sound source information (sound source data) reproduced by the sound reproduction means;
sound information storage means (data output area 84a) for storing the sound information generated by the sound information generation means;
with
The sound reproduction means is
Acquisition means for acquiring the sound source information from the sound source information storage means based on the sound information stored in the sound information storage means (function for executing the processing of step S3104 by the sound source IC 85);
reproduction means for reproducing the sound source information acquired by the acquisition means (function for executing the processing of step S3107 by the sound source IC 85);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the sound reproduction means reproduces sound based on the sound information generated by the sound information generation means, the sound information is reproduced by the sound reproduction means and the data generated by the sound information generation means. It will play the role of linking the data to be processed. That is, the sound reproduction means obtains the sound source information based on the sound information generated by the sound information generation means, and reproduces the sound source information to perform the sound effect. By using the sound information in this manner, it is possible to greatly reduce the amount of data to be exchanged, compared to, for example, a configuration in which sound source information is generated each time.

Feature B9. Specific effect executing means (sub control a function of executing effect data setting processing by the device 81),
The specific effect execution means according to any one of characteristics B1 to B8, characterized in that the predetermined effect is started at the same or substantially the same timing as the start timing of the sound effect by the sound reproduction means. game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the sound effect is started at the same time or substantially at the same time as the predetermined effect, the sound effect is configured to generate superimposed sound information by a plurality of sound information generating means, and each sound is generated. It is possible to easily synchronize the reproduction start timing of the sound based on the sound information generated by the information generating means with the start timing of each predetermined effect. In this way, while superimposing the sound effect like the feature B1, by applying the configuration in which the synchronization can be easily performed to the synchronization with other effects, not only the sound effect but also the other effect can be achieved. With this, it is possible to realize a highly effective presentation with a simple configuration.

Feature B10. The predetermined effect is a display effect in which display frames are updated at a predetermined cycle,
The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein each piece of sound information has a playback length that is an integral multiple of the predetermined cycle, which is the update cycle of the display frame.

According to the above configuration, the reproduction end timing of the sound based on the first sound information (second sound information), ie, the reproduction start timing of the sound based on the third sound information, matches the update timing of the display frame. Thus, by setting the reproduction length of the sound information in relation to the update cycle of the display frame, it is possible to easily match the update timing of the display effect with the switching timing of the sound information that is the basis of sound reproduction. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of discrepancies between display and sound.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A game machine comprising predetermined effect execution means (function for executing effect data setting processing by a sub-control device 81) that executes a predetermined effect at a predetermined timing based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect opportunity,
The predetermined effect execution means is
A sound effect execution means (sound effect execution means ( a function of executing sound data setting processing by the sub control device 81),
The sound effect executing means is
a generation control update means (a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85) for updating the generation control by the sound generation means at a predetermined specific cycle (10 msec cycle);
As the sound information, special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound when the sound generation control is performed by the sound generation means is provided, and the sound generation control based on the special information is performed at the predetermined timing. The first control means (steps S3007, S3008, S3011 by the sub-controller 81, step a function to execute processing such as S3012);
Second control means for controlling the sound generation means (step by the sub-controller 81) so that the sound generation control based on the sound information corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed subsequent to the sound generation control based on the special information a function to execute the processing of S3004, step S3008, step S3012, etc.);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

In a configuration in which a predetermined effect is performed at a predetermined timing based on the occurrence of a performance opportunity, in the above configuration, a sound effect is performed by controlling sound generation by the sound generating means as the predetermined effect. The sound generation control by the sound generating means is executed in a specific period, but depending on the length of the specific period and the execution timing of the predetermined effect, the update timing of the specific period, that is, the update timing of the sound generation control and the execution of the predetermined effect Timing, that is, the timing at which the sound effect should be executed may be deviated. In this regard, in the above configuration, the sound generation control is performed for the special information that is difficult or impossible for the player to comprehend over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation, and then a predetermined effect is produced. Sound generation control is performed based on the sound information. Therefore, even if there is a gap between the update timing of the sound generation control and the timing at which the sound effects should be executed as described above, the sound generation control is started from the update timing with the gap. By doing so, it is possible to start the sound effect from a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the sound effect without requiring a complicated configuration change such as changing the update period in order to eliminate the deviation.

Feature C2. Grasping means for grasping the amount of deviation between the predetermined timing and the update timing of the specific period based on the occurrence of the production opportunity (steps S3005, S3007, steps S3009 to S3011, etc. by the sub-control device 81) function),
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the first control means controls the sound generating means so that the sound generation control based on the special information is performed based on the result of grasping by the grasping means.

According to the above configuration, the amount of deviation between the update timing of the sound generation control and the timing at which the sound effect should be executed is appropriately grasped based on the occurrence of the effect opportunity. By doing so, it becomes possible to achieve a configuration that can cope with the diversification of the amount of deviation, and it is possible to perform sound effects more preferably.

Feature C3. The gaming machine according to feature C2, wherein the grasping means grasps the amount of deviation so that the specific period is shorter than the length of the specific cycle.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of deviation. Therefore, the period during which the sound generation control based on the special information is performed can be shortened, and the data amount of the sound information to be set can be reduced.

Feature C4. The gaming machine according to feature C3, wherein the grasping means grasps the amount of deviation between the update timing immediately before the predetermined timing and the predetermined timing among the update timings of the specific period.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to minimize the amount of deviation. Therefore, the length of the specific period during which the sound generation control based on the special information is performed becomes the shortest, and the amount of data of sound information to be set can be reduced.

Feature C5. A first sound generating means and a second sound generating means are provided as the sound generating means,
As the predetermined timing for executing the predetermined effect when the effect opportunity occurs, the first predetermined timing for executing the first sound effect by the sound generated and controlled by the first sound generating means, and the second sound generation. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein the timing is set so as to be different from the second predetermined timing for executing the second sound effect by the sound generated and controlled by the means.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of sound generation means are provided, and the predetermined timing at which the sound production by the sound generated and controlled by each sound generation means is to be executed is different. In such a configuration, by applying the configuration of the characteristic C1, the start timing of the control is separately adjusted in controlling the performances that are started at different timings even if the performances are based on the same performance opportunity. Each sound effect can be favorably executed without the need to do so and without complicating the processing configuration.

Feature C6. Setting means for setting the sound information used for sound generation control by the first control means and the second control means (function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81),
The setting means sets the sound information used for sound generation control by the first control means and the sound information setting used for sound generation control by the second control means in accordance with the first predetermined The gaming machine according to feature C5, wherein the timing is based on the performance opportunity regardless of the timing and the second predetermined timing.

According to the above configuration, the setting of the sound information for the first sound generation means and the second sound generation means is performed at the timing based on the performance opportunity regardless of the execution timing of the first sound effect and the second sound effect. . By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the sound information is not set and waits for a long time depending on the execution timing of the sound effect.

Feature C7. The first control means is
The sound generation control based on the special information by the first sound generation means is over a specific period corresponding to the amount of lag between the update timing of the first predetermined timing and the specific cycle of the first sound generation means. control to take place,
The sound generation control based on the special information by the second sound generation means is performed over a specific period corresponding to the amount of lag between the update timing of the second predetermined timing and the specific cycle of the second sound generation means. The gaming machine according to feature C5 or feature C6, characterized in that the game is controlled to be performed.

According to the above configuration, even if the execution timing of each sound effect is deviated from the specific period, the sound generation control based on the special information is performed over the specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation. It is also possible to start the sound effect at the intended execution timing while there is a lag from the update timing.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Sound reproduction means (sound source IC 85, amplifier 86, individual speaker 87 A gaming machine comprising a speaker device 64) including
Having a plurality of the sound reproducing means,
The sound information generating means generates a first reproduction period (for example, , the period from t11 to t14 in FIG. 72(c)) and a second sound reproducing means (for example, a second sound source IC 85b, a second amplifier 86b, a second speaker 87b) different from the first sound reproducing means. The overlap period (for example, the period from t11 to t14 in FIGS. 72(c) and 72(d)) overlaps with the second reproduction period (for example, the period from t11 to t14 in FIG. 72(d)). 72(c), a special sound that is difficult or impossible for the player to comprehend is reproduced (for example, the period from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72(c), the 72(d), the period from t11 to t12 and the period from t13 to t14).

According to the above configuration, in the configuration that realizes a superimposed sound effect by overlapping the sound reproduction periods of the plurality of sound reproduction means, the player can grasp the sound reproduced by at least one of the sound reproduction means. It is possible to have overlapping and non-overlapping sounds without turning the playback of each sound on and off, as it becomes difficult or impossible to comprehend certain periods of time. By doing so, it is possible to gradually adjust the degree of overlap of sound effects with a simple configuration. Therefore, it is possible to suitably execute the sound effect.

Feature D2. The sound information generation means reproduces the special sound by the first sound reproduction means as the specific period, and the second sound reproduction means reproduces the normal sound that can be grasped by the player. The sound information is generated so as to generate one specific period and a second specific period during which the normal sound is reproduced by the first sound reproduction means and the special sound is reproduced by the second sound reproduction means. The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized in that it is possible to perform

According to the above configuration, in realizing a superimposed sound effect by the two sound reproducing means, it is possible to generate a period during which only one of the sound reproducing means performs the sound effect. Moreover, such a configuration can be realized by continuously reproducing the normal sound and the specific sound without turning on/off the reproduction of the sound, and the production effect can be preferably obtained without increasing the processing load. becomes possible.

Feature D3. The sound information generating means generates the sound information such that the second specific period occurs following the first specific period, or the first specific period occurs following the second specific period. The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized in that it is possible to

According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the on/off control timings of the two sound reproducing means normally overlap, without performing such on/off control. That is, when the second specific period occurs following the first specific period, normally, at the boundary between them, the first sound reproduction means is turned on and the second sound reproduction means is turned off. There is a need to do. Further, when the first specific period is to occur following the second specific period, normally, at the boundary between the two, the first sound reproduction means is turned off and the first sound reproduction means is turned on. There is a need to do. If the timings of these ON/OFF controls are shifted, there may occur a period during which both sounds cannot be heard. In this regard, in the above configuration, switching between the special sound and the normal sound is performed by continuously reproducing the special sound and the normal sound without using such on/off control, so that there is no inconvenience caused by the deviation of the control timing. , it is possible to produce an effect by generating both specific periods.

Feature D4. The end timing of the first reproduction period overlaps the end timing of the second reproduction period by generating the sound information so as to generate the specific period by the sound information generation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

According to the above configuration, reproduction of sounds by both sound reproduction means ends at the same time. By doing so, for example, when reproducing a so-called loop effect sound, there is an event that there are sound reproducing means that have already finished reproducing sound and sound reproducing means that have not finished reproducing sound. does not occur. As a result, there is no need to vary the control depending on whether or not the reproduction of these sounds has ended, and uniform control can be achieved, thereby simplifying the processing configuration. Moreover, in order to achieve the same end timing depending on the specific period during which the special sound is reproduced, the above effect can be achieved without reconsidering the harmony of the sound in the production, such as considering the overlap of the normal sound. becomes possible.

Note that "the end timing of the first reproduction period and the end timing of the second reproduction period overlap" means that "the end timing of the first reproduction period and the end timing of the second reproduction period overlap". It may be expressed as "the same or substantially the same timing". In this case, "the same or substantially the same timing" may be expressed as "the same timing to the extent that the player cannot or cannot grasp the difference in timing".

Feature D5. A length of a first specific period during which the first sound reproducing means reproduces the special sound by the sound information generating means and a second specific period during which the second sound reproducing means reproduces the special sound, The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the end timing of the first reproduction period overlaps the end timing of the second reproduction period by generating the sound information differently.

According to the above configuration, by setting the sound information for the special sounds having different reproduction lengths, the reproduction of the sounds by the two sound reproducing means is simultaneously completed. By doing so, even if the reproduction period of the normal sound by the two sound reproduction means is different, the effect of feature D4 can be obtained.

Feature D6. As the sound effect performed by the sound reproduction means, after the reproduction of the sound in the first reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the reproduction of the sound in the second reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means are completed, and a specific sound effect (loop effect) is set for starting the reproduction of the sound in the first reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the reproduction of the sound in the second reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means. The gaming machine according to feature D4 or feature D5, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, in the so-called loop effect as the specific sound effect, when the sound reproduction by each sound reproduction means is restarted, the reproduction of all the sounds ends at the same timing. There is no need to wait for the end of sound reproduction by any sound reproduction means. In other words, any sound reproduction means can resume sound reproduction after finishing its own sound reproduction, and there is no need for a configuration for checking trends of other sound reproduction means. Therefore, a loop effect can be realized with a simple configuration.

Feature D7. A start timing of the first reproduction period and a start timing of the second reproduction period are overlapped by generating the sound information so as to cause the specific period by the sound information generating means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

According to the above configuration, reproduction of sounds by both sound reproduction means is started at the same time. By doing so, in realizing the superimposed sound production by the dual-sound reproducing means based on the production opportunity, the reproduction start timing of the sound reproducing means on the side that has not started reproduction is determined after the production opportunity. no need arises. Therefore, it is possible to achieve superimposed sound production with a simple configuration. Moreover, in order to achieve the same start timing depending on the specific period during which the sound based on the special information is reproduced, the above-mentioned sound reproduction is performed without reconsidering the harmony of the sound in the production, such as considering the overlap of the normal sound. It becomes possible to produce an effect.

Note that "the start timing of the first reproduction period and the start timing of the second reproduction period overlap" means that "the start timing of the first reproduction period and the start timing of the second reproduction period overlap". It may be expressed as "the same or substantially the same timing". In this case, "the same or substantially the same timing" may be expressed as "the same timing to the extent that the player cannot or cannot grasp the difference in timing".

Feature D8. Characteristic D1 characterized in that the first reproduction period and the second reproduction period have the same length by generating the sound information so as to generate the specific period by the sound information generating means. The gaming machine according to any one of D7.

According to the above configuration, since the sound reproduction period of the first sound reproduction means and the sound reproduction period of the second sound reproduction means have the same length, a superimposed sound effect is realized by the plurality of sound reproduction means. In doing so, it becomes possible to evenly distribute the processing load. This makes it possible to avoid a local increase in processing load. Moreover, in order to make the reproduction period the same depending on the specific period during which the special sound is reproduced, the above effect can be achieved without reconsidering the harmony of the sound in the production, such as considering the overlap of the normal sound. becomes possible.

Feature D9. The sound information generating means is configured such that the overlap period is the specific period, the start timing of the second reproduction period occurs after the start timing of the first reproduction period, and the start timing of the first reproduction period occurs after the end timing of the first reproduction period. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the predetermined sound information can be set so that the end timing of the second reproduction period occurs.

According to the above configuration, even though the first reproduction period and the second reproduction period have overlapping periods, they are set so that there is a difference between the periods. During the overlapping period, one sound becomes a special sound and the player cannot grasp it. By doing so, continuous sound production can be realized without interruption by a plurality of sound reproducing means, such as sound generation by the first sound reproducing means and sound generation by the second sound reproducing means. .

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature groups A to D to each configuration of the feature group A to feature group D detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type gaming machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for finally stopping and displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols after the symbol row is variably displayed, and the symbol variation starts due to the operation of the starting operation means A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine, 32... Reel, 41... Start lever, 42-44... Stop switch, 64... Speaker device, 65... Liquid crystal display device, 81... Display control device, 82... CPU, 85... Sound source IC, 86... Amplifier , 87... Individual speakers, 101... Main control device, 102... CPU, 201... Display control device, 202... CPU.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine comprising sound reproducing means capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generating means,
Having a plurality of the sound reproducing means,
a first reproduction period during which the sound is reproduced by the first sound reproduction means among the plurality of sound reproduction means; and a second reproduction period during which the sound is reproduced by the second sound reproduction means different from the first sound reproduction means. Means capable of generating a specific period during which a special sound is reproduced that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to comprehend the sound reproduced by at least one of the sound reproduction means during the overlapping period in which the above overlaps. with
A gaming machine , wherein the end timing of the first reproduction period overlaps with the end timing of the second reproduction period .

Images